mirror of
https://github.com/autc04/Retro68.git
synced 2024-11-27 14:50:23 +00:00
8149 lines
367 KiB
Plaintext
8149 lines
367 KiB
Plaintext
This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from ld.texinfo.
|
||
|
||
INFO-DIR-SECTION Software development
|
||
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
||
* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
|
||
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
||
|
||
This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.23.91.
|
||
|
||
Copyright (C) 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
||
|
||
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
||
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
|
||
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
|
||
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
|
||
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
|
||
Free Documentation License".
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Up: (dir)
|
||
|
||
LD
|
||
**
|
||
|
||
This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.23.91.
|
||
|
||
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
|
||
Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
|
||
in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Overview:: Overview
|
||
* Invocation:: Invocation
|
||
* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
|
||
|
||
* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
|
||
|
||
* BFD:: BFD
|
||
|
||
* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
|
||
* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
|
||
* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
|
||
* LD Index:: LD Index
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Overview, Next: Invocation, Prev: Top, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
1 Overview
|
||
**********
|
||
|
||
`ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
|
||
data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
|
||
a program is to run `ld'.
|
||
|
||
`ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
|
||
AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
|
||
total control over the linking process.
|
||
|
||
This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
|
||
operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
|
||
object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
|
||
Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
|
||
of object file. *Note BFD::, for more information.
|
||
|
||
Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
|
||
linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
|
||
execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
|
||
`ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
|
||
some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Invocation, Next: Scripts, Prev: Overview, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
2 Invocation
|
||
************
|
||
|
||
The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
|
||
to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result, you
|
||
have many choices to control its behavior.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Options:: Command Line Options
|
||
* Environment:: Environment Variables
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Options, Next: Environment, Up: Invocation
|
||
|
||
2.1 Command Line Options
|
||
========================
|
||
|
||
The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
|
||
practice few of them are used in any particular context. For instance,
|
||
a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
|
||
standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to link a file
|
||
`hello.o':
|
||
|
||
ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
|
||
|
||
This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
|
||
linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
|
||
which will come from the standard search directories. (See the
|
||
discussion of the `-l' option below.)
|
||
|
||
Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
|
||
point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
|
||
as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
|
||
option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
|
||
other file options. Repeating non-file options with a different
|
||
argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
|
||
occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
|
||
option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
|
||
noted in the descriptions below.
|
||
|
||
Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
|
||
linked together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
|
||
command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
|
||
placed between an option and its argument.
|
||
|
||
Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
|
||
can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
|
||
script command language. If _no_ binary input files at all are
|
||
specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
|
||
message `No input files'.
|
||
|
||
If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
|
||
assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
|
||
augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
|
||
linker script or the one specified by using `-T'). This feature
|
||
permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
|
||
or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
|
||
`INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects. Specifying a script in this
|
||
way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
|
||
placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
|
||
default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
|
||
command. *Note Scripts::.
|
||
|
||
For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
|
||
either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
|
||
given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
|
||
requires them.
|
||
|
||
For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
|
||
can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
|
||
`--trace-symbol' are equivalent. Note--there is one exception to this
|
||
rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
|
||
only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
|
||
`-o' option. So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
|
||
`magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
|
||
|
||
Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
|
||
the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
|
||
immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
|
||
`--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent. Unique
|
||
abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
|
||
|
||
Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
|
||
driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
|
||
prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
|
||
compiler driver) like this:
|
||
|
||
gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
|
||
|
||
This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
|
||
silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
|
||
may also arise when passing options that require values through a
|
||
driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a
|
||
separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
|
||
and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
|
||
the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
|
||
|
||
gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
|
||
|
||
Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
|
||
GNU linker:
|
||
|
||
`@FILE'
|
||
Read command-line options from FILE. The options read are
|
||
inserted in place of the original @FILE option. If FILE does not
|
||
exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
|
||
literally, and not removed.
|
||
|
||
Options in FILE are separated by whitespace. A whitespace
|
||
character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
|
||
option in either single or double quotes. Any character
|
||
(including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
|
||
to be included with a backslash. The FILE may itself contain
|
||
additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
|
||
recursively.
|
||
|
||
`-a KEYWORD'
|
||
This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The KEYWORD
|
||
argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
|
||
`default'. `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
|
||
and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
|
||
`-Bdynamic'. This option may be used any number of times.
|
||
|
||
`--audit AUDITLIB'
|
||
Adds AUDITLIB to the `DT_AUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
|
||
AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
|
||
DT_SONAME specified in the library. If specified multiple times
|
||
`DT_AUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces
|
||
to use. If the linker finds an object with an audit entry while
|
||
searching for shared libraries, it will add a corresponding
|
||
`DT_DEPAUDIT' entry in the output file. This option is only
|
||
meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
|
||
|
||
`-A ARCHITECTURE'
|
||
`--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
|
||
In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
|
||
Intel 960 family of architectures. In that `ld' configuration, the
|
||
ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
|
||
the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
|
||
archive-library search path. *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
|
||
i960, for details.
|
||
|
||
Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
|
||
other architecture families.
|
||
|
||
`-b INPUT-FORMAT'
|
||
`--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
|
||
`ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
||
file. If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
|
||
option to specify the binary format for input object files that
|
||
follow this option on the command line. Even when `ld' is
|
||
configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
|
||
usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
|
||
expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
|
||
machine. INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
|
||
format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the
|
||
available binary formats with `objdump -i'.) *Note BFD::.
|
||
|
||
You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
|
||
unusual binary format. You can also use `-b' to switch formats
|
||
explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
|
||
including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
|
||
particular format.
|
||
|
||
The default format is taken from the environment variable
|
||
`GNUTARGET'. *Note Environment::. You can also define the input
|
||
format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
|
||
Commands::.
|
||
|
||
`-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
|
||
`--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
|
||
For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
|
||
files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
|
||
described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI. Introduce
|
||
MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
|
||
linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
|
||
language. If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
|
||
directories specified by any `-L' options.
|
||
|
||
`-d'
|
||
`-dc'
|
||
`-dp'
|
||
These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
|
||
for compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common
|
||
symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
|
||
`-r'). The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
|
||
effect. *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
|
||
|
||
`--depaudit AUDITLIB'
|
||
`-P AUDITLIB'
|
||
Adds AUDITLIB to the `DT_DEPAUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
|
||
AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
|
||
DT_SONAME specified in the library. If specified multiple times
|
||
`DT_DEPAUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit
|
||
interfaces to use. This option is only meaningful on ELF
|
||
platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface. The -P option is
|
||
provided for Solaris compatibility.
|
||
|
||
`-e ENTRY'
|
||
`--entry=ENTRY'
|
||
Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
|
||
program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no
|
||
symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
|
||
and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
|
||
in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
|
||
`0' for base 8). *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
|
||
and other ways of specifying the entry point.
|
||
|
||
`--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
|
||
Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
|
||
not be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited
|
||
by commas or colons. Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
|
||
symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export. This
|
||
option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
||
linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
|
||
explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
|
||
this option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
|
||
option will be treated as hidden.
|
||
|
||
`--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...'
|
||
Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which
|
||
symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be
|
||
copied wholesale into the import library being generated during
|
||
the link. The module names may be delimited by commas or colons,
|
||
and must match exactly the filenames used by `ld' to open the
|
||
files; for archive members, this is simply the member name, but
|
||
for object files the name listed must include and match precisely
|
||
any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
|
||
command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE
|
||
targeted port of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def
|
||
file are still exported, regardless of this option.
|
||
|
||
`-E'
|
||
`--export-dynamic'
|
||
`--no-export-dynamic'
|
||
When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the `-E'
|
||
option or the `--export-dynamic' option causes the linker to add
|
||
all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table
|
||
is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at
|
||
run time.
|
||
|
||
If you do not use either of these options (or use the
|
||
`--no-export-dynamic' option to restore the default behavior), the
|
||
dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols
|
||
which are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
|
||
|
||
If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
|
||
back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
|
||
dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
|
||
linking the program itself.
|
||
|
||
You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
|
||
be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
|
||
it. See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
|
||
|
||
Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE
|
||
targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a
|
||
DLL or EXE; see the description of `--export-all-symbols' below.
|
||
|
||
`-EB'
|
||
Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
|
||
|
||
`-EL'
|
||
Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output
|
||
format.
|
||
|
||
`-f NAME'
|
||
`--auxiliary=NAME'
|
||
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
|
||
field to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that
|
||
the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
|
||
auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
|
||
|
||
If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
|
||
you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
|
||
field. If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
|
||
object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
|
||
shared object NAME. If there is one, it will be used instead of
|
||
the definition in the filter object. The shared object NAME need
|
||
not exist. Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
|
||
alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
|
||
debugging or for machine specific performance.
|
||
|
||
This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY
|
||
entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
|
||
command line.
|
||
|
||
`-F NAME'
|
||
`--filter=NAME'
|
||
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
|
||
field to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that
|
||
the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
|
||
should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
|
||
object NAME.
|
||
|
||
If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
|
||
you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
|
||
field. The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
|
||
symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
|
||
link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME. Thus the
|
||
filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
|
||
provided by the object NAME.
|
||
|
||
Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
|
||
toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
|
||
output object files. The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
|
||
this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
|
||
`TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
|
||
environment variable. The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
|
||
when not creating an ELF shared object.
|
||
|
||
`-fini=NAME'
|
||
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
|
||
the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
|
||
the address of the function. By default, the linker uses `_fini'
|
||
as the function to call.
|
||
|
||
`-g'
|
||
Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
|
||
|
||
`-G VALUE'
|
||
`--gpsize=VALUE'
|
||
Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
|
||
register to SIZE. This is only meaningful for object file formats
|
||
such as MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into
|
||
different sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
|
||
|
||
`-h NAME'
|
||
`-soname=NAME'
|
||
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
|
||
field to the specified name. When an executable is linked with a
|
||
shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
|
||
executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
|
||
shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
|
||
using the file name given to the linker.
|
||
|
||
`-i'
|
||
Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
|
||
|
||
`-init=NAME'
|
||
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
|
||
the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
|
||
the address of the function. By default, the linker uses `_init'
|
||
as the function to call.
|
||
|
||
`-l NAMESPEC'
|
||
`--library=NAMESPEC'
|
||
Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
|
||
of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
|
||
If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
|
||
library path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search
|
||
the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
|
||
|
||
On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
|
||
files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'. Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
|
||
systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
|
||
`libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
|
||
(By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
|
||
Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
|
||
always specifies a file called FILENAME.
|
||
|
||
The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
|
||
it is specified on the command line. If the archive defines a
|
||
symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
|
||
the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
|
||
appropriate file(s) from the archive. However, an undefined
|
||
symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
|
||
cause the linker to search the archive again.
|
||
|
||
See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
|
||
archives multiple times.
|
||
|
||
You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
|
||
|
||
This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
|
||
However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
|
||
from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
|
||
|
||
`-L SEARCHDIR'
|
||
`--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
|
||
Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
|
||
archive libraries and `ld' control scripts. You may use this
|
||
option any number of times. The directories are searched in the
|
||
order in which they are specified on the command line.
|
||
Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
|
||
default directories. All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
|
||
regardless of the order in which the options appear. `-L' options
|
||
do not affect how `ld' searches for a linker script unless `-T'
|
||
option is specified.
|
||
|
||
If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
|
||
"sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
|
||
|
||
The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
|
||
`-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
|
||
cases also on how it was configured. *Note Environment::.
|
||
|
||
The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
|
||
`SEARCH_DIR' command. Directories specified this way are searched
|
||
at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
|
||
line.
|
||
|
||
`-m EMULATION'
|
||
Emulate the EMULATION linker. You can list the available
|
||
emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
|
||
|
||
If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
|
||
`LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
|
||
|
||
Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
|
||
configured.
|
||
|
||
`-M'
|
||
`--print-map'
|
||
Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
|
||
information about the link, including the following:
|
||
|
||
* Where object files are mapped into memory.
|
||
|
||
* How common symbols are allocated.
|
||
|
||
* All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
|
||
the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
|
||
|
||
* The values assigned to symbols.
|
||
|
||
Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
|
||
which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
|
||
symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
|
||
This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
|
||
only retains the final value of an expression. Under such
|
||
circumstances the linker will display the final value
|
||
enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a linker
|
||
script containing:
|
||
|
||
foo = 1
|
||
foo = foo * 4
|
||
foo = foo + 8
|
||
|
||
will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
|
||
option is used:
|
||
|
||
0x00000001 foo = 0x1
|
||
[0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
|
||
[0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
|
||
|
||
See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
|
||
expressions in linker scripts.
|
||
|
||
`-n'
|
||
`--nmagic'
|
||
Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against
|
||
shared libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic
|
||
numbers, mark the output as `NMAGIC'.
|
||
|
||
`-N'
|
||
`--omagic'
|
||
Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also,
|
||
do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
|
||
shared libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic
|
||
numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
|
||
text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
|
||
to the format specification published by Microsoft.
|
||
|
||
`--no-omagic'
|
||
This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option. It
|
||
sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
|
||
to be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking
|
||
against shared libraries. Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
|
||
|
||
`-o OUTPUT'
|
||
`--output=OUTPUT'
|
||
Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
|
||
option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default. The
|
||
script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
|
||
|
||
`-O LEVEL'
|
||
If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
|
||
output. This might take significantly longer and therefore
|
||
probably should only be enabled for the final binary. At the
|
||
moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
|
||
Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
|
||
Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
|
||
for different non-zero values of this option. Again this may
|
||
change with future releases.
|
||
|
||
`-q'
|
||
`--emit-relocs'
|
||
Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
|
||
Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
|
||
information in order to perform correct modifications of
|
||
executables. This results in larger executables.
|
||
|
||
This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
|
||
|
||
`--force-dynamic'
|
||
Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is
|
||
specific to VxWorks targets.
|
||
|
||
`-r'
|
||
`--relocatable'
|
||
Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
|
||
can in turn serve as input to `ld'. This is often called "partial
|
||
linking". As a side effect, in environments that support standard
|
||
Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
|
||
number to `OMAGIC'. If this option is not specified, an absolute
|
||
file is produced. When linking C++ programs, this option _will
|
||
not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
|
||
|
||
When an input file does not have the same format as the output
|
||
file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
|
||
not contain any relocations. Different output formats can have
|
||
further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
|
||
not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
|
||
all.
|
||
|
||
This option does the same thing as `-i'.
|
||
|
||
`-R FILENAME'
|
||
`--just-symbols=FILENAME'
|
||
Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
|
||
relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output
|
||
file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
|
||
in other programs. You may use this option more than once.
|
||
|
||
For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
|
||
followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
|
||
treated as the `-rpath' option.
|
||
|
||
`-s'
|
||
`--strip-all'
|
||
Omit all symbol information from the output file.
|
||
|
||
`-S'
|
||
`--strip-debug'
|
||
Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
|
||
output file.
|
||
|
||
`-t'
|
||
`--trace'
|
||
Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
|
||
|
||
`-T SCRIPTFILE'
|
||
`--script=SCRIPTFILE'
|
||
Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script. This script replaces `ld''s
|
||
default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
|
||
must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
|
||
*Note Scripts::. If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
|
||
directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
|
||
preceding `-L' options. Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
|
||
|
||
`-dT SCRIPTFILE'
|
||
`--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
|
||
Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script. *Note Scripts::.
|
||
|
||
This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
|
||
processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
|
||
command line has been processed. This allows options placed after
|
||
the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
|
||
behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
|
||
linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
|
||
(eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
|
||
such as `gcc').
|
||
|
||
`-u SYMBOL'
|
||
`--undefined=SYMBOL'
|
||
Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
||
symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
||
modules from standard libraries. `-u' may be repeated with
|
||
different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
|
||
This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
|
||
|
||
`-Ur'
|
||
For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
|
||
`-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
|
||
can in turn serve as input to `ld'. When linking C++ programs,
|
||
`-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'. It
|
||
does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
|
||
with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
|
||
be added to. Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
|
||
for the others.
|
||
|
||
`--unique[=SECTION]'
|
||
Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
|
||
SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
|
||
for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
|
||
specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
|
||
multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal
|
||
merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
|
||
section assignments in a linker script.
|
||
|
||
`-v'
|
||
`--version'
|
||
`-V'
|
||
Display the version number for `ld'. The `-V' option also lists
|
||
the supported emulations.
|
||
|
||
`-x'
|
||
`--discard-all'
|
||
Delete all local symbols.
|
||
|
||
`-X'
|
||
`--discard-locals'
|
||
Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
|
||
system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
|
||
systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
|
||
|
||
`-y SYMBOL'
|
||
`--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
|
||
Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears. This
|
||
option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is
|
||
necessary to prepend an underscore.
|
||
|
||
This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
|
||
link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
|
||
|
||
`-Y PATH'
|
||
Add PATH to the default library search path. This option exists
|
||
for Solaris compatibility.
|
||
|
||
`-z KEYWORD'
|
||
The recognized keywords are:
|
||
`combreloc'
|
||
Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
|
||
dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
|
||
|
||
`defs'
|
||
Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined
|
||
symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
|
||
|
||
`execstack'
|
||
Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
|
||
|
||
`global'
|
||
This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
|
||
It makes the symbols defined by this shared object available
|
||
for symbol resolution of subsequently loaded libraries.
|
||
|
||
`initfirst'
|
||
This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
|
||
It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
|
||
occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
|
||
brought into the process at the same time. Similarly the
|
||
runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
|
||
runtime finalization of any other objects.
|
||
|
||
`interpose'
|
||
Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
|
||
symbols but the primary executable.
|
||
|
||
`lazy'
|
||
When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
|
||
tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
|
||
the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
|
||
than at load time. Lazy binding is the default.
|
||
|
||
`loadfltr'
|
||
Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
|
||
runtime.
|
||
|
||
`muldefs'
|
||
Allows multiple definitions.
|
||
|
||
`nocombreloc'
|
||
Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
|
||
|
||
`nocopyreloc'
|
||
Disables production of copy relocs.
|
||
|
||
`nodefaultlib'
|
||
Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
|
||
object will ignore any default library search paths.
|
||
|
||
`nodelete'
|
||
Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
|
||
|
||
`nodlopen'
|
||
Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
|
||
|
||
`nodump'
|
||
Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
|
||
|
||
`noexecstack'
|
||
Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
|
||
|
||
`norelro'
|
||
Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
|
||
object.
|
||
|
||
`now'
|
||
When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
|
||
tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
|
||
program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
|
||
using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
|
||
to the point when the function is first called.
|
||
|
||
`origin'
|
||
Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
|
||
|
||
`relro'
|
||
Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
|
||
|
||
`max-page-size=VALUE'
|
||
Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
|
||
|
||
`common-page-size=VALUE'
|
||
Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
|
||
|
||
`stack-size=VALUE'
|
||
Specify a stack size for in an ELF `PT_GNU_STACK' segment.
|
||
Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
|
||
`PT_GNU_STACK' segment creation.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
|
||
|
||
`-( ARCHIVES -)'
|
||
`--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
|
||
The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files. They may be
|
||
either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
|
||
|
||
The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
|
||
undefined references are created. Normally, an archive is
|
||
searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
|
||
command line. If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
|
||
undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
|
||
appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
|
||
resolve that reference. By grouping the archives, they all be
|
||
searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
|
||
|
||
Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best
|
||
to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
|
||
between two or more archives.
|
||
|
||
`--accept-unknown-input-arch'
|
||
`--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
|
||
Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
|
||
recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are
|
||
doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
|
||
This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
|
||
2.14. The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
|
||
reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
|
||
option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
|
||
|
||
`--as-needed'
|
||
`--no-as-needed'
|
||
This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
|
||
mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
|
||
Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
|
||
library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
|
||
library is actually needed or not. `--as-needed' causes a
|
||
DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted for a library that _at that point
|
||
in the link_ satisfies a non-weak undefined symbol reference from
|
||
a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
|
||
DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a non-weak undefined symbol
|
||
reference from another dynamic library. Object files or libraries
|
||
appearing on the command line _after_ the library in question do
|
||
not affect whether the library is seen as needed. This is similar
|
||
to the rules for extraction of object files from archives.
|
||
`--no-as-needed' restores the default behaviour.
|
||
|
||
`--add-needed'
|
||
`--no-add-needed'
|
||
These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
|
||
their names to the `--as-needed' and `--no-as-needed' options.
|
||
They have been replaced by `--copy-dt-needed-entries' and
|
||
`--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
|
||
|
||
`-assert KEYWORD'
|
||
This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
|
||
|
||
`-Bdynamic'
|
||
`-dy'
|
||
`-call_shared'
|
||
Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on
|
||
platforms for which shared libraries are supported. This option
|
||
is normally the default on such platforms. The different variants
|
||
of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
|
||
may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
|
||
library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
|
||
|
||
`-Bgroup'
|
||
Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
|
||
section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
|
||
object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
|
||
`--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied. This option is only
|
||
meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
||
|
||
`-Bstatic'
|
||
`-dn'
|
||
`-non_shared'
|
||
`-static'
|
||
Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
|
||
platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
|
||
variants of this option are for compatibility with various
|
||
systems. You may use this option multiple times on the command
|
||
line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
|
||
it. This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
|
||
This option can be used with `-shared'. Doing so means that a
|
||
shared library is being created but that all of the library's
|
||
external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
|
||
static libraries.
|
||
|
||
`-Bsymbolic'
|
||
When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
|
||
to the definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it
|
||
is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
|
||
override the definition within the shared library. This option is
|
||
only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
||
|
||
`-Bsymbolic-functions'
|
||
When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
|
||
symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any. This
|
||
option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
|
||
libraries.
|
||
|
||
`--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
|
||
Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
|
||
typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
|
||
global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
|
||
definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
|
||
linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
|
||
added to the symbol table in the executable. This option is only
|
||
meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
||
|
||
The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
|
||
without scope and node name. See *Note VERSION:: for more
|
||
information.
|
||
|
||
`--dynamic-list-data'
|
||
Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
|
||
|
||
`--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
|
||
Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
|
||
It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
|
||
|
||
`--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
|
||
Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
|
||
identification.
|
||
|
||
`--check-sections'
|
||
`--no-check-sections'
|
||
Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
|
||
been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the
|
||
linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
|
||
will produce suitable error messages. The linker does know about,
|
||
and does make allowances for sections in overlays. The default
|
||
behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
|
||
`--check-sections'. Section overlap is not usually checked for
|
||
relocatable links. You can force checking in that case by using
|
||
the `--check-sections' option.
|
||
|
||
`--copy-dt-needed-entries'
|
||
`--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'
|
||
This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
|
||
by DT_NEEDED tags _inside_ ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
|
||
command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
|
||
output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
|
||
input dynamic library. With `--copy-dt-needed-entries' specified
|
||
on the command line however any dynamic libraries that follow it
|
||
will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default behaviour
|
||
can be restored with `--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
|
||
|
||
This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in
|
||
dynamic libraries. With `--copy-dt-needed-entries' dynamic
|
||
libraries mentioned on the command line will be recursively
|
||
searched, following their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in
|
||
order to resolve symbols required by the output binary. With the
|
||
default setting however the searching of dynamic libraries that
|
||
follow it will stop with the dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED
|
||
links will be traversed to resolve symbols.
|
||
|
||
`--cref'
|
||
Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
|
||
generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
|
||
Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
|
||
|
||
The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
|
||
easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are
|
||
printed out, sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file
|
||
names is given. If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
|
||
is the location of the definition. If the symbol is defined as a
|
||
common value then any files where this happens appear next.
|
||
Finally any files that reference the symbol are listed.
|
||
|
||
`--no-define-common'
|
||
This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
|
||
The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
|
||
*Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
|
||
|
||
The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
|
||
assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
|
||
file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
|
||
assigning addresses to Common symbols. Using `--no-define-common'
|
||
allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
|
||
be assigned addresses only in the main program. This eliminates
|
||
the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
|
||
prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
|
||
duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
|
||
search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
|
||
|
||
`--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
|
||
Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
|
||
address given by EXPRESSION. You may use this option as many
|
||
times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
|
||
A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
|
||
this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
|
||
an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
|
||
hexadecimal constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate
|
||
expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
|
||
script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
|
||
_Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
|
||
sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
|
||
|
||
`--demangle[=STYLE]'
|
||
`--no-demangle'
|
||
These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
|
||
messages and other output. When the linker is told to demangle,
|
||
it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
|
||
leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
|
||
and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
|
||
Different compilers have different mangling styles. The optional
|
||
demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
|
||
demangling style for your compiler. The linker will demangle by
|
||
default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
|
||
set. These options may be used to override the default.
|
||
|
||
`-IFILE'
|
||
`--dynamic-linker=FILE'
|
||
Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
|
||
generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
|
||
linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
|
||
you are doing.
|
||
|
||
`--fatal-warnings'
|
||
`--no-fatal-warnings'
|
||
Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be
|
||
restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
|
||
|
||
`--force-exe-suffix'
|
||
Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
|
||
|
||
If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
|
||
`.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
|
||
output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
|
||
option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
|
||
Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
|
||
an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
|
||
|
||
`--gc-sections'
|
||
`--no-gc-sections'
|
||
Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored
|
||
on targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour
|
||
(of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
|
||
specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
|
||
|
||
`--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
|
||
symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry symbol
|
||
and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
|
||
will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
|
||
dynamic objects. Note that when building shared libraries, the
|
||
linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced. Once
|
||
this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
|
||
recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
|
||
relocations. See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
|
||
|
||
This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
|
||
option `-r'). In this case the root of symbols kept must be
|
||
explicitly specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
|
||
option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
|
||
|
||
`--print-gc-sections'
|
||
`--no-print-gc-sections'
|
||
List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
|
||
printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
|
||
collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option. The
|
||
default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
|
||
can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
|
||
command line.
|
||
|
||
`--print-output-format'
|
||
Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
|
||
other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
|
||
in an `OUTPUT_FORMAT' linker script command (*note File
|
||
Commands::).
|
||
|
||
`--help'
|
||
Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
|
||
and exit.
|
||
|
||
`--target-help'
|
||
Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
|
||
output and exit.
|
||
|
||
`-Map=MAPFILE'
|
||
Print a link map to the file MAPFILE. See the description of the
|
||
`-M' option, above.
|
||
|
||
`--no-keep-memory'
|
||
`ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
|
||
symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells `ld' to
|
||
instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
|
||
as necessary. This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
|
||
space while linking a large executable.
|
||
|
||
`--no-undefined'
|
||
`-z defs'
|
||
Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
|
||
This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
|
||
library. The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
|
||
behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
|
||
libraries being linked in.
|
||
|
||
`--allow-multiple-definition'
|
||
`-z muldefs'
|
||
Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
|
||
report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
|
||
the first definition will be used.
|
||
|
||
`--allow-shlib-undefined'
|
||
`--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
|
||
Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries. This
|
||
switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that it determines
|
||
the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library
|
||
rather than a regular object file. It does not affect how
|
||
undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
|
||
|
||
The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
|
||
referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to
|
||
create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being
|
||
used to create a shared library.
|
||
|
||
The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
|
||
libraries specified at link time are that:
|
||
|
||
* A shared library specified at link time may not be the same
|
||
as the one that is available at load time, so the symbol
|
||
might actually be resolvable at load time.
|
||
|
||
* There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where
|
||
undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal.
|
||
|
||
The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load
|
||
time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the
|
||
current architecture. This is used, for example, to
|
||
dynamically select an appropriate memset function.
|
||
|
||
`--no-undefined-version'
|
||
Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
|
||
ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
|
||
and a fatal error will be issued instead.
|
||
|
||
`--default-symver'
|
||
Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
|
||
unversioned exported symbols.
|
||
|
||
`--default-imported-symver'
|
||
Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
|
||
unversioned imported symbols.
|
||
|
||
`--no-warn-mismatch'
|
||
Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
|
||
files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
|
||
have been compiled for different processors or for different
|
||
endiannesses. This option tells `ld' that it should silently
|
||
permit such possible errors. This option should only be used with
|
||
care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
|
||
ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
|
||
|
||
`--no-warn-search-mismatch'
|
||
Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
|
||
library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
|
||
|
||
`--no-whole-archive'
|
||
Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
|
||
archive files.
|
||
|
||
`--noinhibit-exec'
|
||
Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
|
||
Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
|
||
encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
|
||
writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
|
||
|
||
`-nostdlib'
|
||
Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
|
||
command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
|
||
(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
|
||
ignored.
|
||
|
||
`--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT'
|
||
`ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
||
file. If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
|
||
`--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
|
||
object file. Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
|
||
object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
|
||
should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
|
||
usual format on each machine. OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
|
||
name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You
|
||
can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.) The
|
||
script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
|
||
but this option overrides it. *Note BFD::.
|
||
|
||
`-pie'
|
||
`--pic-executable'
|
||
Create a position independent executable. This is currently only
|
||
supported on ELF platforms. Position independent executables are
|
||
similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
|
||
dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
|
||
(which can vary between invocations). Like normal dynamically
|
||
linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
|
||
executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
|
||
|
||
`-qmagic'
|
||
This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
|
||
|
||
`-Qy'
|
||
This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
|
||
|
||
`--relax'
|
||
`--no-relax'
|
||
An option with machine dependent effects. This option is only
|
||
supported on a few targets. *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
|
||
*Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960. *Note `ld' and Xtensa
|
||
Processors: Xtensa. *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
|
||
M68HC11/68HC12. *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
|
||
PowerPC ELF32.
|
||
|
||
On some platforms the `--relax' option performs target specific,
|
||
global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
|
||
addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
|
||
synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
|
||
instructions, and combining constant values.
|
||
|
||
On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
|
||
symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible. This
|
||
is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
|
||
family of processors.
|
||
|
||
On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
|
||
but ignored.
|
||
|
||
On platforms where `--relax' is accepted the option `--no-relax'
|
||
can be used to disable the feature.
|
||
|
||
`--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME'
|
||
Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
|
||
all others. FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
|
||
per line. This option is especially useful in environments (such
|
||
as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
|
||
gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
|
||
|
||
`--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
|
||
symbols needed for relocations.
|
||
|
||
You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
|
||
line. It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
|
||
|
||
`-rpath=DIR'
|
||
Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used
|
||
when linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All `-rpath'
|
||
arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
|
||
uses them to locate shared objects at runtime. The `-rpath'
|
||
option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
|
||
by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
|
||
description of the `-rpath-link' option. If `-rpath' is not used
|
||
when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
|
||
variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
|
||
|
||
The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
|
||
SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
|
||
`-L' options it is given. If a `-rpath' option is used, the
|
||
runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
|
||
options, ignoring the `-L' options. This can be useful when using
|
||
gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
|
||
systems.
|
||
|
||
For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
|
||
followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
|
||
treated as the `-rpath' option.
|
||
|
||
`-rpath-link=DIR'
|
||
When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
|
||
This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
|
||
as one of the input files.
|
||
|
||
When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
|
||
non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
|
||
locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
|
||
it is not included explicitly. In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
|
||
option specifies the first set of directories to search. The
|
||
`-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
|
||
either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
|
||
appearing multiple times.
|
||
|
||
This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
|
||
path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
|
||
such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
|
||
search path than the runtime linker would do.
|
||
|
||
The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
|
||
shared libraries:
|
||
1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
|
||
|
||
2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options. The difference
|
||
between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
|
||
specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
|
||
and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
|
||
effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
|
||
only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
|
||
been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
|
||
|
||
3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
|
||
`-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
|
||
the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
|
||
|
||
4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
|
||
directories specified using `-L' options.
|
||
|
||
5. For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
|
||
variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
|
||
|
||
6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
|
||
`DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
|
||
libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
|
||
`DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
|
||
|
||
7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
|
||
|
||
8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
|
||
`/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
|
||
that file.
|
||
|
||
If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
|
||
a warning and continue with the link.
|
||
|
||
`-shared'
|
||
`-Bshareable'
|
||
Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF,
|
||
XCOFF and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will
|
||
automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
|
||
used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
|
||
|
||
`--sort-common'
|
||
`--sort-common=ascending'
|
||
`--sort-common=descending'
|
||
This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
|
||
ascending or descending order when it places them in the
|
||
appropriate output sections. The symbol alignments considered are
|
||
sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
|
||
one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
|
||
constraints. If no sorting order is specified, then descending
|
||
order is assumed.
|
||
|
||
`--sort-section=name'
|
||
This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
|
||
patterns in the linker script.
|
||
|
||
`--sort-section=alignment'
|
||
This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
|
||
patterns in the linker script.
|
||
|
||
`--split-by-file[=SIZE]'
|
||
Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
|
||
each input file when SIZE is reached. SIZE defaults to a size of
|
||
1 if not given.
|
||
|
||
`--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]'
|
||
Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
|
||
single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
|
||
relocations. This is useful when generating huge relocatable
|
||
files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
|
||
object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
|
||
relocations in a single section. Note that this will fail to work
|
||
with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
|
||
The linker will not split up individual input sections for
|
||
redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
|
||
COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
|
||
relocations. COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
|
||
|
||
`--stats'
|
||
Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
|
||
such as execution time and memory usage.
|
||
|
||
`--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
|
||
Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
|
||
configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
|
||
that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
|
||
|
||
`--traditional-format'
|
||
For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
|
||
the output of some existing linker. This switch requests `ld' to
|
||
use the traditional format instead.
|
||
|
||
For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
|
||
symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file
|
||
with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
|
||
Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
|
||
program (`gdb' has no trouble). The `--traditional-format' switch
|
||
tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
|
||
|
||
`--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG'
|
||
Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
|
||
by ORG. You may use this option as many times as necessary to
|
||
locate multiple sections in the command line. ORG must be a
|
||
single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
|
||
you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
|
||
values. _Note:_ there should be no white space between
|
||
SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
|
||
|
||
`-Tbss=ORG'
|
||
`-Tdata=ORG'
|
||
`-Ttext=ORG'
|
||
Same as `--section-start', with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
|
||
SECTIONNAME.
|
||
|
||
`-Ttext-segment=ORG'
|
||
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the
|
||
address of the first byte of the text segment.
|
||
|
||
`-Trodata-segment=ORG'
|
||
When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
|
||
the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the
|
||
executable text, it will set the address of the first byte of the
|
||
read-only data segment.
|
||
|
||
`-Tldata-segment=ORG'
|
||
When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium
|
||
memory model, it will set the address of the first byte of the
|
||
ldata segment.
|
||
|
||
`--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
|
||
Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four
|
||
possible values for `method':
|
||
|
||
`ignore-all'
|
||
Do not report any unresolved symbols.
|
||
|
||
`report-all'
|
||
Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
|
||
|
||
`ignore-in-object-files'
|
||
Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
|
||
libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
|
||
files.
|
||
|
||
`ignore-in-shared-libs'
|
||
Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
|
||
files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
|
||
This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
|
||
known that all the shared libraries that it should be
|
||
referencing are included on the linker's command line.
|
||
|
||
The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
|
||
controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
|
||
|
||
Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
|
||
reported unresolved symbol but the option
|
||
`--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
|
||
|
||
`--dll-verbose'
|
||
`--verbose[=NUMBER]'
|
||
Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
|
||
supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
|
||
Display the linker script being used by the linker. If the
|
||
optional NUMBER argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be
|
||
displayed.
|
||
|
||
`--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
|
||
Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is
|
||
typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
|
||
additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
|
||
being created. This option is only fully supported on ELF
|
||
platforms which support shared libraries; see *Note VERSION::. It
|
||
is partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version
|
||
scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
|
||
symbols marked `local' in the version script will not be exported.
|
||
*Note WIN32::.
|
||
|
||
`--warn-common'
|
||
Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
|
||
or with a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat
|
||
sloppy practice, but linkers on some other operating systems do
|
||
not. This option allows you to find potential problems from
|
||
combining global symbols. Unfortunately, some C libraries use
|
||
this practice, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
|
||
libraries as well as in your programs.
|
||
|
||
There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
|
||
examples:
|
||
|
||
`int i = 1;'
|
||
A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
|
||
the output file.
|
||
|
||
`extern int i;'
|
||
An undefined reference, which does not allocate space. There
|
||
must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
|
||
variable somewhere.
|
||
|
||
`int i;'
|
||
A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common
|
||
symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
|
||
area of the output file. The linker merges multiple common
|
||
symbols for the same variable into a single symbol. If they
|
||
are of different sizes, it picks the largest size. The
|
||
linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
|
||
a definition of the same variable.
|
||
|
||
The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
|
||
Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
|
||
symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
|
||
symbol encountered with the same name. One or both of the two
|
||
symbols will be a common symbol.
|
||
|
||
1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
|
||
already a definition for the symbol.
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
||
overridden by definition
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
|
||
|
||
2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
|
||
definition for the symbol is encountered. This is the same
|
||
as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
|
||
in a different order.
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
|
||
overriding common
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
|
||
|
||
3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
|
||
symbol.
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
|
||
of `SYMBOL'
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
|
||
|
||
4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
||
overridden by larger common
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
|
||
|
||
5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
|
||
symbol. This is the same as the previous case, except that
|
||
the symbols are encountered in a different order.
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
||
overriding smaller common
|
||
FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
|
||
|
||
`--warn-constructors'
|
||
Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for
|
||
a few object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the
|
||
linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
|
||
|
||
`--warn-multiple-gp'
|
||
Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
|
||
file. This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
|
||
Alpha. Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
|
||
in a special section. A special register (the global pointer)
|
||
points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
|
||
loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
|
||
Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
|
||
relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
|
||
the constant pool. Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
|
||
to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
|
||
address all possible constants. This option causes a warning to
|
||
be issued whenever this case occurs.
|
||
|
||
`--warn-once'
|
||
Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
|
||
module which refers to it.
|
||
|
||
`--warn-section-align'
|
||
Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
|
||
alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
|
||
section. The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
|
||
specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
|
||
start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
|
||
|
||
`--warn-shared-textrel'
|
||
Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
|
||
|
||
`--warn-alternate-em'
|
||
Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
|
||
|
||
`--warn-unresolved-symbols'
|
||
If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
|
||
option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
|
||
This option makes it generate a warning instead.
|
||
|
||
`--error-unresolved-symbols'
|
||
This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
|
||
when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
|
||
|
||
`--whole-archive'
|
||
For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
|
||
`--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
|
||
in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
|
||
object files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into
|
||
a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
|
||
resulting shared library. This option may be used more than once.
|
||
|
||
Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
|
||
about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
|
||
Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
|
||
list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
|
||
your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
|
||
|
||
`--wrap=SYMBOL'
|
||
Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL. Any undefined reference to
|
||
SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'. Any undefined
|
||
reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
|
||
|
||
This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
|
||
wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'. If it wishes
|
||
to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
|
||
|
||
Here is a trivial example:
|
||
|
||
void *
|
||
__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
|
||
{
|
||
printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
|
||
return __real_malloc (c);
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
|
||
all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
|
||
instead. The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
|
||
the real `malloc' function.
|
||
|
||
You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
|
||
links without the `--wrap' option will succeed. If you do this,
|
||
you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
|
||
file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
|
||
call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
|
||
|
||
`--eh-frame-hdr'
|
||
Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
|
||
`PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
|
||
|
||
`--no-ld-generated-unwind-info'
|
||
Request creation of `.eh_frame' unwind info for linker generated
|
||
code sections like PLT. This option is on by default if linker
|
||
generated unwind info is supported.
|
||
|
||
`--enable-new-dtags'
|
||
`--disable-new-dtags'
|
||
This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
|
||
ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
|
||
`--enable-new-dtags', the new dynamic tags will be created as
|
||
needed and older dynamic tags will be omitted. If you specify
|
||
`--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be created. By
|
||
default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that those
|
||
options are only available for ELF systems.
|
||
|
||
`--hash-size=NUMBER'
|
||
Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
|
||
close to NUMBER. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
|
||
time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
|
||
increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing
|
||
this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
|
||
speed.
|
||
|
||
`--hash-style=STYLE'
|
||
Set the type of linker's hash table(s). STYLE can be either
|
||
`sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
|
||
`.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
|
||
new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables. The default is `sysv'.
|
||
|
||
`--reduce-memory-overheads'
|
||
This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
|
||
expense of linking speed. This was introduced to select the old
|
||
O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
|
||
O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
|
||
|
||
Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
|
||
to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
|
||
linker's run time. This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
|
||
switch has been used.
|
||
|
||
The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
|
||
enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
|
||
|
||
`--build-id'
|
||
`--build-id=STYLE'
|
||
Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section. The
|
||
contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
|
||
STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
|
||
160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
|
||
`md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
|
||
output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
|
||
specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
|
||
characters between digit pairs are ignored). If STYLE is omitted,
|
||
`sha1' is used.
|
||
|
||
The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
|
||
the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
|
||
nonidentical output files. It is not intended to be compared as a
|
||
checksum for the file's contents. A linked file may be changed
|
||
later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
|
||
original linked file does not change.
|
||
|
||
Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
|
||
`--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
|
||
|
||
2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
|
||
-----------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
|
||
output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
|
||
executable. You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
|
||
option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
|
||
files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
|
||
file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
|
||
ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
|
||
|
||
In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
|
||
support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
|
||
PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their values
|
||
by either a space or an equals sign.
|
||
|
||
`--add-stdcall-alias'
|
||
If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
|
||
as-is and also with the suffix stripped. [This option is specific
|
||
to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--base-file FILE'
|
||
Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
|
||
of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
|
||
[This is an i386 PE specific option]
|
||
|
||
`--dll'
|
||
Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
|
||
`-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file. [This
|
||
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--enable-long-section-names'
|
||
`--disable-long-section-names'
|
||
The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that
|
||
permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the
|
||
normal limit for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed
|
||
in object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry
|
||
the Coff string table required to support the longer names. As a
|
||
GNU extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable
|
||
images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!) disallow it in
|
||
object files, by using these two options. Executable images
|
||
generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard,
|
||
carrying as they do a string table, and may generate confusing
|
||
output when examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file
|
||
viewers and dumpers. However, GDB relies on the use of PE long
|
||
section names to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an
|
||
executable image at runtime, and so if neither option is specified
|
||
on the command-line, `ld' will enable long section names,
|
||
overriding the default and technically correct behaviour, when it
|
||
finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
|
||
image and not stripping symbols. [This option is valid for all PE
|
||
targeted ports of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--enable-stdcall-fixup'
|
||
`--disable-stdcall-fixup'
|
||
If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
|
||
to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
|
||
differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
|
||
and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For
|
||
example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
|
||
function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
|
||
linked to the function `_bar'. When the linker does this, it
|
||
prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
|
||
but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
|
||
need this feature to be usable. If you specify
|
||
`--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
|
||
warnings are not printed. If you specify
|
||
`--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
|
||
mismatches are considered to be errors. [This option is specific
|
||
to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--leading-underscore'
|
||
`--no-leading-underscore'
|
||
For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is
|
||
defined in target's description. By this option it is possible to
|
||
disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
|
||
|
||
`--export-all-symbols'
|
||
If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
|
||
will be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if
|
||
there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
|
||
explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
|
||
function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
|
||
unless this option is given. Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
|
||
`DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
|
||
not be automatically exported. Also, symbols imported from other
|
||
DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
|
||
DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
|
||
ending with `_iname'. In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
|
||
`libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported. Symbols
|
||
whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
|
||
exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an extensive
|
||
list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
|
||
this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets). These
|
||
cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
|
||
`_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
|
||
`_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
|
||
`cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
|
||
`environ'. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
|
||
of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
|
||
Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
|
||
exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
|
||
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
||
linker]
|
||
|
||
`--exclude-all-symbols'
|
||
Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported. [This
|
||
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--file-alignment'
|
||
Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always
|
||
begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number. This
|
||
defaults to 512. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
|
||
port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--heap RESERVE'
|
||
`--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
|
||
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
|
||
commit) to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB
|
||
reserved, 4K committed. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
||
targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--image-base VALUE'
|
||
Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll. This is the
|
||
lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
|
||
is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
|
||
of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
|
||
overlap any other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables,
|
||
and 0x10000000 for dlls. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
||
targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--kill-at'
|
||
If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
|
||
before they are exported. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
||
targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--large-address-aware'
|
||
If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
|
||
the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
|
||
virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used
|
||
in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
|
||
the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise,
|
||
this bit has no effect. [This option is specific to PE targeted
|
||
ports of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--disable-large-address-aware'
|
||
Reverts the effect of a previous `--large-address-aware' option.
|
||
This is useful if `--large-address-aware' is always set by the
|
||
compiler driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not
|
||
support virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes. [This option
|
||
is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--major-image-version VALUE'
|
||
Sets the major number of the "image version". Defaults to 1.
|
||
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
||
linker]
|
||
|
||
`--major-os-version VALUE'
|
||
Sets the major number of the "os version". Defaults to 4. [This
|
||
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
|
||
Sets the major number of the "subsystem version". Defaults to 4.
|
||
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
||
linker]
|
||
|
||
`--minor-image-version VALUE'
|
||
Sets the minor number of the "image version". Defaults to 0.
|
||
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
||
linker]
|
||
|
||
`--minor-os-version VALUE'
|
||
Sets the minor number of the "os version". Defaults to 0. [This
|
||
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
|
||
Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version". Defaults to 0.
|
||
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
||
linker]
|
||
|
||
`--output-def FILE'
|
||
The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
|
||
corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
|
||
(which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
|
||
library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
|
||
automatically or implicitly exported symbols. [This option is
|
||
specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--out-implib FILE'
|
||
The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
|
||
lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
|
||
lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
|
||
clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
|
||
possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
|
||
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
||
linker]
|
||
|
||
`--enable-auto-image-base'
|
||
Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
|
||
specified using the `--image-base' argument. By using a hash
|
||
generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
|
||
DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
|
||
execution are avoided. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
||
targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--disable-auto-image-base'
|
||
Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
|
||
user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
|
||
default. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
|
||
the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--dll-search-prefix STRING'
|
||
When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
|
||
search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
|
||
`lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
|
||
between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
|
||
uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
|
||
`--dll-search-prefix=cyg'. [This option is specific to the i386
|
||
PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--enable-auto-import'
|
||
Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
|
||
imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
|
||
building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
|
||
of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
|
||
image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
|
||
PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
|
||
|
||
Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
|
||
data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
|
||
placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
|
||
around a problem with consts that is described here:
|
||
http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
|
||
|
||
Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
|
||
may see this message:
|
||
|
||
"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
||
documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
|
||
|
||
This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
|
||
ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
|
||
only allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses
|
||
to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
|
||
as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
|
||
DLL. Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
|
||
trigger this error condition. However, regardless of the exact
|
||
data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
|
||
detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
|
||
|
||
There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
|
||
the data type of the exported variable:
|
||
|
||
One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
|
||
the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
|
||
environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
|
||
supports this feature.
|
||
|
||
A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
|
||
variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
|
||
For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
|
||
array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
|
||
variable. Thus:
|
||
|
||
extern type extern_array[];
|
||
extern_array[1] -->
|
||
{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
|
||
|
||
or
|
||
|
||
extern type extern_array[];
|
||
extern_array[1] -->
|
||
{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
|
||
|
||
For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
|
||
is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
|
||
variable:
|
||
|
||
extern struct s extern_struct;
|
||
extern_struct.field -->
|
||
{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
|
||
|
||
or
|
||
|
||
extern long long extern_ll;
|
||
extern_ll -->
|
||
{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
|
||
|
||
A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
|
||
'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
|
||
`__declspec(dllimport)'. However, in practice that requires using
|
||
compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
|
||
building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
|
||
building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
|
||
between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
|
||
constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
|
||
usage:
|
||
|
||
Original:
|
||
--foo.h
|
||
extern int arr[];
|
||
--foo.c
|
||
#include "foo.h"
|
||
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
||
printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
Solution 1:
|
||
--foo.h
|
||
extern int arr[];
|
||
--foo.c
|
||
#include "foo.h"
|
||
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
||
/* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
|
||
volatile int *parr = arr;
|
||
printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
Solution 2:
|
||
--foo.h
|
||
/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
|
||
#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
|
||
!(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
|
||
#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
||
#else
|
||
#define FOO_IMPORT
|
||
#endif
|
||
extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
|
||
--foo.c
|
||
#include "foo.h"
|
||
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
||
printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
|
||
use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
|
||
offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
|
||
functions). [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
|
||
of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--disable-auto-import'
|
||
Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
|
||
`__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs. [This option is
|
||
specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
|
||
If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
|
||
section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
|
||
switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
|
||
can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
|
||
data in your client code. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
||
targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
|
||
Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
|
||
from DLLs. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
|
||
of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--enable-extra-pe-debug'
|
||
Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
|
||
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
||
linker]
|
||
|
||
`--section-alignment'
|
||
Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin
|
||
at addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to
|
||
0x1000. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
|
||
the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--stack RESERVE'
|
||
`--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
|
||
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
|
||
commit) to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB
|
||
reserved, 4K committed. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
||
targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--subsystem WHICH'
|
||
`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
|
||
`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
|
||
Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
|
||
legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
|
||
`posix', and `xbox'. You may optionally set the subsystem version
|
||
also. Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH. [This option
|
||
is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
||
|
||
The following options set flags in the `DllCharacteristics' field
|
||
of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted
|
||
ports of the linker]
|
||
|
||
`--dynamicbase'
|
||
The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
|
||
randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
|
||
Vista for i386 PE targets.
|
||
|
||
`--forceinteg'
|
||
Code integrity checks are enforced.
|
||
|
||
`--nxcompat'
|
||
The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention. This
|
||
feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
|
||
|
||
`--no-isolation'
|
||
Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
|
||
|
||
`--no-seh'
|
||
The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this
|
||
image.
|
||
|
||
`--no-bind'
|
||
Do not bind this image.
|
||
|
||
`--wdmdriver'
|
||
The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
|
||
|
||
`--tsaware'
|
||
The image is Terminal Server aware.
|
||
|
||
`--insert-timestamp'
|
||
Insert a real timestamp into the image, rather than the default
|
||
value of zero. This will result in a slightly different results
|
||
with each invocation, which could be helpful for distributing
|
||
unique images.
|
||
|
||
2.1.2 Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
|
||
---------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support
|
||
shared libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a
|
||
unique index; all executables use an index of 0.
|
||
|
||
`--dsbt-size SIZE'
|
||
This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current
|
||
executable or shared library to SIZE. The default is to create a
|
||
table with 64 entries.
|
||
|
||
`--dsbt-index INDEX'
|
||
This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or
|
||
shared library to INDEX. The default is 0, which is appropriate
|
||
for generating executables. If a shared library is generated with
|
||
a DSBT index of 0, the `R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX' relocs are copied into
|
||
the output file.
|
||
|
||
The `--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
|
||
adjacent exidx entries in frame unwind info.
|
||
|
||
|
||
2.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
|
||
------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
|
||
memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
|
||
|
||
`--no-trampoline'
|
||
This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
|
||
trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
|
||
using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
|
||
function is taken).
|
||
|
||
`--bank-window NAME'
|
||
This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
|
||
in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
|
||
window. The definition of such region is then used by the linker
|
||
to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
2.1.4 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
|
||
---------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
|
||
generation when linking for 68K targets.
|
||
|
||
`--got=TYPE'
|
||
This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
|
||
TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
|
||
`target'. For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
|
||
|
||
|
||
2.1.5 Options specific to MIPS targets
|
||
--------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
|
||
generation when linking for MIPS targets.
|
||
|
||
`--insn32'
|
||
`--no-insn32'
|
||
These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in
|
||
code generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy
|
||
binding stubs, or in relaxation. If `--insn32' is used, then the
|
||
linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if
|
||
`--no-insn32' is used, all instruction encodings are used,
|
||
including 16-bit ones where possible.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Environment, Prev: Options, Up: Invocation
|
||
|
||
2.2 Environment Variables
|
||
=========================
|
||
|
||
You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
|
||
`GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
|
||
|
||
`GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
|
||
`-b' (or its synonym `--format'). Its value should be one of the BFD
|
||
names for an input format (*note BFD::). If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
|
||
the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
|
||
`GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
|
||
format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
|
||
there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
|
||
that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
|
||
However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
|
||
conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
|
||
ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
|
||
|
||
`LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
|
||
`-m' option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
|
||
behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
|
||
available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options. If the `-m'
|
||
option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
|
||
defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
|
||
configured.
|
||
|
||
Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
|
||
`COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
|
||
to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in a
|
||
similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program. The default may
|
||
be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Scripts, Next: Machine Dependent, Prev: Invocation, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
3 Linker Scripts
|
||
****************
|
||
|
||
Every link is controlled by a "linker script". This script is written
|
||
in the linker command language.
|
||
|
||
The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
|
||
sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
|
||
to control the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts
|
||
do nothing more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script
|
||
can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
|
||
commands described below.
|
||
|
||
The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
|
||
yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
|
||
linker executable. You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
|
||
display the default linker script. Certain command line options, such
|
||
as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
|
||
|
||
You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
|
||
option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
|
||
linker script.
|
||
|
||
You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
|
||
files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. *Note
|
||
Implicit Linker Scripts::.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
||
* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
|
||
* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
|
||
* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
|
||
* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
|
||
* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
|
||
* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
|
||
* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
|
||
* VERSION:: VERSION Command
|
||
* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
||
* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Basic Script Concepts, Next: Script Format, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
||
================================
|
||
|
||
We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
|
||
describe the linker script language.
|
||
|
||
The linker combines input files into a single output file. The
|
||
output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
|
||
"object file format". Each file is called an "object file". The
|
||
output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
|
||
will also call it an object file. Each object file has, among other
|
||
things, a list of "sections". We sometimes refer to a section in an
|
||
input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
|
||
file is an "output section".
|
||
|
||
Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
|
||
also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
|
||
A section may be marked as "loadable", which means that the contents
|
||
should be loaded into memory when the output file is run. A section
|
||
with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
|
||
memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
|
||
there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section which
|
||
is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
|
||
debugging information.
|
||
|
||
Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
|
||
first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address. This is the address the
|
||
section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
|
||
"LMA", or load memory address. This is the address at which the
|
||
section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
|
||
same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
|
||
is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
|
||
(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
|
||
based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
|
||
RAM address would be the VMA.
|
||
|
||
You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
|
||
program with the `-h' option.
|
||
|
||
Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
|
||
table". A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol has a name,
|
||
and each defined symbol has an address, among other information. If
|
||
you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
|
||
defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
|
||
variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
|
||
referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
|
||
|
||
You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
|
||
or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Script Format, Next: Simple Example, Prev: Basic Script Concepts, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.2 Linker Script Format
|
||
========================
|
||
|
||
Linker scripts are text files.
|
||
|
||
You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
|
||
either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
|
||
symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
|
||
generally ignored.
|
||
|
||
Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
|
||
directly. If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
|
||
would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
|
||
in double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
|
||
file name.
|
||
|
||
You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
|
||
`/*' and `*/'. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
|
||
whitespace.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Example, Next: Simple Commands, Prev: Script Format, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
|
||
================================
|
||
|
||
Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
|
||
|
||
The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
|
||
`SECTIONS'. You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
|
||
layout of the output file.
|
||
|
||
The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command. Here we will describe
|
||
a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of code,
|
||
initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
|
||
`.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively. Let's assume
|
||
further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
|
||
files.
|
||
|
||
For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
|
||
0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
|
||
linker script which will do that:
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
. = 0x10000;
|
||
.text : { *(.text) }
|
||
. = 0x8000000;
|
||
.data : { *(.data) }
|
||
.bss : { *(.bss) }
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
|
||
by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
|
||
enclosed in curly braces.
|
||
|
||
The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
|
||
sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
|
||
counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
|
||
other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
|
||
current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
|
||
incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
|
||
`SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
|
||
|
||
The second line defines an output section, `.text'. The colon is
|
||
required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
|
||
after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
|
||
which should be placed into this output section. The `*' is a wildcard
|
||
which matches any file name. The expression `*(.text)' means all
|
||
`.text' input sections in all input files.
|
||
|
||
Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
|
||
`.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
|
||
section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
|
||
|
||
The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
|
||
output file. The linker will place the `.data' output section at
|
||
address `0x8000000'. After the linker places the `.data' output
|
||
section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
|
||
size of the `.data' output section. The effect is that the linker will
|
||
place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
|
||
section in memory.
|
||
|
||
The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
|
||
alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
|
||
example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
|
||
will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
|
||
have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
|
||
|
||
That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Commands, Next: Assignments, Prev: Simple Example, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
|
||
=================================
|
||
|
||
In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
|
||
* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
|
||
|
||
* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
|
||
|
||
* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
|
||
* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Entry Point, Next: File Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
||
|
||
3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
|
||
-----------------------------
|
||
|
||
The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
|
||
point". You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
|
||
point. The argument is a symbol name:
|
||
ENTRY(SYMBOL)
|
||
|
||
There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set
|
||
the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
|
||
stopping when one of them succeeds:
|
||
* the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
|
||
|
||
* the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
|
||
|
||
* the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
|
||
targets this is `start', but PE and BeOS based systems for example
|
||
check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one
|
||
found.
|
||
|
||
* the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
|
||
|
||
* The address `0'.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: File Commands, Next: Format Commands, Prev: Entry Point, Up: Simple Commands
|
||
|
||
3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
|
||
---------------------------------
|
||
|
||
Several linker script commands deal with files.
|
||
|
||
`INCLUDE FILENAME'
|
||
Include the linker script FILENAME at this point. The file will
|
||
be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
|
||
specified with the `-L' option. You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
|
||
up to 10 levels deep.
|
||
|
||
You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
|
||
`SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
|
||
|
||
`INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
||
`INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
|
||
The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
|
||
in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
|
||
|
||
For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
|
||
a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
|
||
line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
|
||
|
||
In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
|
||
linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
|
||
option.
|
||
|
||
In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
|
||
with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
|
||
inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
|
||
the "sysroot prefix". Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
|
||
file in the current directory. If it is not found, the linker
|
||
will search through the archive library search path. See the
|
||
description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
|
||
|
||
If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
|
||
`libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
|
||
|
||
When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
|
||
files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
|
||
script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
|
||
|
||
`GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
||
`GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
|
||
The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
|
||
should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
|
||
new undefined references are created. See the description of `-('
|
||
in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
|
||
|
||
`AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
||
`AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
|
||
This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
|
||
commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
|
||
as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
|
||
with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
|
||
when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
|
||
`--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
|
||
restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
|
||
afterwards.
|
||
|
||
`OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
|
||
The `OUTPUT' command names the output file. Using
|
||
`OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
|
||
FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
|
||
Options.). If both are used, the command line option takes
|
||
precedence.
|
||
|
||
You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
|
||
output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
|
||
|
||
`SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
|
||
The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
|
||
looks for archive libraries. Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
|
||
like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
|
||
Options: Options.). If both are used, then the linker will search
|
||
both paths. Paths specified using the command line option are
|
||
searched first.
|
||
|
||
`STARTUP(FILENAME)'
|
||
The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
|
||
that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
|
||
though it were specified first on the command line. This may be
|
||
useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
|
||
start of the first file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Format Commands, Next: REGION_ALIAS, Prev: File Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
||
|
||
3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
|
||
-----------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
|
||
|
||
`OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
|
||
`OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
|
||
The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
|
||
output file (*note BFD::). Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
|
||
exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
|
||
Command Line Options: Options.). If both are used, the command
|
||
line option takes precedence.
|
||
|
||
You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
|
||
formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options. This
|
||
permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
|
||
desired endianness.
|
||
|
||
If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
|
||
be the first argument, DEFAULT. If `-EB' is used, the output
|
||
format will be the second argument, BIG. If `-EL' is used, the
|
||
output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
|
||
|
||
For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
|
||
uses this command:
|
||
OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
|
||
This says that the default format for the output file is
|
||
`elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
|
||
option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
|
||
format.
|
||
|
||
`TARGET(BFDNAME)'
|
||
The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
|
||
files. It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands. This
|
||
command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
|
||
Command Line Options: Options.). If the `TARGET' command is used
|
||
but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
|
||
used to set the format for the output file. *Note BFD::.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: REGION_ALIAS, Next: Miscellaneous Commands, Prev: Format Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
||
|
||
3.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions
|
||
------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
|
||
*Note MEMORY:: command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory
|
||
region.
|
||
|
||
REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION)
|
||
|
||
The `REGION_ALIAS' function creates an alias name ALIAS for the
|
||
memory region REGION. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
|
||
to memory regions. An example follows.
|
||
|
||
Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with
|
||
various memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile
|
||
memory `RAM' that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have
|
||
a read-only, non-volatile memory `ROM' that allows code execution and
|
||
read-only data access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile
|
||
memory `ROM2' with read-only data access and no code execution
|
||
capability. We have four output sections:
|
||
|
||
* `.text' program code;
|
||
|
||
* `.rodata' read-only data;
|
||
|
||
* `.data' read-write initialized data;
|
||
|
||
* `.bss' read-write zero initialized data.
|
||
|
||
The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system
|
||
independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent
|
||
part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the
|
||
system. Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups
|
||
`A', `B' and `C':
|
||
Section Variant A Variant B Variant C
|
||
.text RAM ROM ROM
|
||
.rodata RAM ROM ROM2
|
||
.data RAM RAM/ROM RAM/ROM2
|
||
.bss RAM RAM RAM
|
||
The notation `RAM/ROM' or `RAM/ROM2' means that this section is
|
||
loaded into region `ROM' or `ROM2' respectively. Please note that the
|
||
load address of the `.data' section starts in all three variants at the
|
||
end of the `.rodata' section.
|
||
|
||
The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.
|
||
It includes the system dependent `linkcmds.memory' file that describes
|
||
the memory layout:
|
||
INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
.text :
|
||
{
|
||
*(.text)
|
||
} > REGION_TEXT
|
||
.rodata :
|
||
{
|
||
*(.rodata)
|
||
rodata_end = .;
|
||
} > REGION_RODATA
|
||
.data : AT (rodata_end)
|
||
{
|
||
data_start = .;
|
||
*(.data)
|
||
} > REGION_DATA
|
||
data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
|
||
data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
|
||
.bss :
|
||
{
|
||
*(.bss)
|
||
} > REGION_BSS
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
Now we need three different `linkcmds.memory' files to define memory
|
||
regions and alias names. The content of `linkcmds.memory' for the three
|
||
variants `A', `B' and `C':
|
||
`A'
|
||
Here everything goes into the `RAM'.
|
||
MEMORY
|
||
{
|
||
RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
||
|
||
`B'
|
||
Program code and read-only data go into the `ROM'. Read-write
|
||
data goes into the `RAM'. An image of the initialized data is
|
||
loaded into the `ROM' and will be copied during system start into
|
||
the `RAM'.
|
||
MEMORY
|
||
{
|
||
ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
|
||
RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
||
|
||
`C'
|
||
Program code goes into the `ROM'. Read-only data goes into the
|
||
`ROM2'. Read-write data goes into the `RAM'. An image of the
|
||
initialized data is loaded into the `ROM2' and will be copied
|
||
during system start into the `RAM'.
|
||
MEMORY
|
||
{
|
||
ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
|
||
ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
||
RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
||
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
||
|
||
It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to
|
||
copy the `.data' section from `ROM' or `ROM2' into the `RAM' if
|
||
necessary:
|
||
#include <string.h>
|
||
|
||
extern char data_start [];
|
||
extern char data_size [];
|
||
extern char data_load_start [];
|
||
|
||
void copy_data(void)
|
||
{
|
||
if (data_start != data_load_start)
|
||
{
|
||
memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Miscellaneous Commands, Prev: REGION_ALIAS, Up: Simple Commands
|
||
|
||
3.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands
|
||
----------------------------------
|
||
|
||
There are a few other linker scripts commands.
|
||
|
||
`ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
|
||
Ensure that EXP is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
|
||
with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
|
||
|
||
`EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
|
||
Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
||
symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
||
modules from standard libraries. You may list several SYMBOLs for
|
||
each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times. This
|
||
command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
|
||
|
||
`FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
|
||
This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
|
||
to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
|
||
output file is specified (`-r').
|
||
|
||
`INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
|
||
This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
|
||
command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
|
||
to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
|
||
|
||
`INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
|
||
This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
|
||
augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays. It
|
||
inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
|
||
OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
|
||
linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
|
||
sections. *Note Location Counter::. The insertion happens after
|
||
the linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to
|
||
the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
|
||
linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
|
||
default linker script statements in the internal linker
|
||
representation of the script. In particular, input section
|
||
assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
|
||
the default script. Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
|
||
`INSERT' might look:
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
OVERLAY :
|
||
{
|
||
.ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
|
||
.ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
INSERT AFTER .text;
|
||
|
||
`NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
|
||
This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
|
||
references among certain output sections.
|
||
|
||
In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
|
||
using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
|
||
section will not be. Any direct references between the two
|
||
sections would be errors. For example, it would be an error if
|
||
code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
|
||
|
||
The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names. If
|
||
`ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
|
||
an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
|
||
`NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
|
||
names.
|
||
|
||
`OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
|
||
Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is
|
||
one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::). You can
|
||
see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
|
||
program with the `-f' option.
|
||
|
||
`LD_FEATURE(STRING)'
|
||
This command may be used to modify `ld' behavior. If STRING is
|
||
`"SANE_EXPR"' then absolute symbols and numbers in a script are
|
||
simply treated as numbers everywhere. *Note Expression Section::.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Assignments, Next: SECTIONS, Prev: Simple Commands, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
|
||
===============================
|
||
|
||
You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
|
||
the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
|
||
* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
|
||
* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
|
||
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
||
* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Assignments, Next: HIDDEN, Up: Assignments
|
||
|
||
3.5.1 Simple Assignments
|
||
------------------------
|
||
|
||
You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
|
||
|
||
`SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
`SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
`SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
`SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
`SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
`SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
`SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
`SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
`SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
|
||
|
||
The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION. In
|
||
the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
|
||
adjusted accordingly.
|
||
|
||
The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter. You may
|
||
only use this within a `SECTIONS' command. *Note Location Counter::.
|
||
|
||
The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
|
||
|
||
Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
|
||
|
||
You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
|
||
as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
|
||
section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
|
||
|
||
The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
|
||
expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
|
||
|
||
Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
|
||
assignments may be used:
|
||
|
||
floating_point = 0;
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
.text :
|
||
{
|
||
*(.text)
|
||
_etext = .;
|
||
}
|
||
_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
|
||
.data : { *(.data) }
|
||
}
|
||
In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
|
||
zero. The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
|
||
last `.text' input section. The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
|
||
address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
|
||
boundary.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: HIDDEN, Next: PROVIDE, Prev: Simple Assignments, Up: Assignments
|
||
|
||
3.5.2 HIDDEN
|
||
------------
|
||
|
||
For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
|
||
exported. The syntax is `HIDDEN(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
|
||
|
||
Here is the example from *Note Simple Assignments::, rewritten to use
|
||
`HIDDEN':
|
||
|
||
HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
.text :
|
||
{
|
||
*(.text)
|
||
HIDDEN(_etext = .);
|
||
}
|
||
HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
|
||
.data : { *(.data) }
|
||
}
|
||
In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this
|
||
module.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: PROVIDE, Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Prev: HIDDEN, Up: Assignments
|
||
|
||
3.5.3 PROVIDE
|
||
-------------
|
||
|
||
In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
|
||
only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
|
||
the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
|
||
However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
|
||
function name without encountering an error. The `PROVIDE' keyword may
|
||
be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
|
||
but not defined. The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
|
||
|
||
Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
.text :
|
||
{
|
||
*(.text)
|
||
_etext = .;
|
||
PROVIDE(etext = .);
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
|
||
underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
|
||
the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
|
||
underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
|
||
If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
|
||
will use the definition in the linker script.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Next: Source Code Reference, Prev: PROVIDE, Up: Assignments
|
||
|
||
3.5.4 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
||
--------------------
|
||
|
||
Similar to `PROVIDE'. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
|
||
hidden and won't be exported.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Source Code Reference, Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Up: Assignments
|
||
|
||
3.5.5 Source Code Reference
|
||
---------------------------
|
||
|
||
Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
|
||
intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
|
||
variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
|
||
that does not have a value.
|
||
|
||
Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
|
||
transform names in the source code into different names when they are
|
||
stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
|
||
prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
|
||
mangling'. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
|
||
a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
|
||
variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
|
||
linker script variable might be referred to as:
|
||
|
||
extern int foo;
|
||
|
||
But in the linker script it might be defined as:
|
||
|
||
_foo = 1000;
|
||
|
||
In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
|
||
transformation has taken place.
|
||
|
||
When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
|
||
things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
|
||
the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol. The second is
|
||
that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
|
||
holds the symbol's _address_. ie the symbol table contains the address
|
||
of the block of memory holding the symbol's value. So for example the
|
||
following C declaration, at file scope:
|
||
|
||
int foo = 1000;
|
||
|
||
creates an entry called `foo' in the symbol table. This entry holds
|
||
the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
|
||
initially stored.
|
||
|
||
When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
|
||
first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
|
||
memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
|
||
So:
|
||
|
||
foo = 1;
|
||
|
||
looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
|
||
associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
|
||
address. Whereas:
|
||
|
||
int * a = & foo;
|
||
|
||
looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets its address and
|
||
then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
|
||
variable `a'.
|
||
|
||
Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
|
||
the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
|
||
an address without a value. So for example the linker script
|
||
definition:
|
||
|
||
foo = 1000;
|
||
|
||
creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
|
||
address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
|
||
address 1000. This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
|
||
linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
|
||
access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
|
||
|
||
Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
|
||
code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
|
||
attempt to use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the
|
||
contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
|
||
.FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
|
||
|
||
start_of_ROM = .ROM;
|
||
end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
|
||
start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
|
||
|
||
Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
|
||
|
||
extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
|
||
|
||
memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
|
||
|
||
Note the use of the `&' operators. These are correct.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: SECTIONS, Next: MEMORY, Prev: Assignments, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.6 SECTIONS Command
|
||
====================
|
||
|
||
The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
|
||
output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
|
||
|
||
The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
SECTIONS-COMMAND
|
||
SECTIONS-COMMAND
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
|
||
|
||
* an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
|
||
|
||
* a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
|
||
|
||
* an output section description
|
||
|
||
* an overlay description
|
||
|
||
The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
|
||
`SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
|
||
those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
|
||
understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
|
||
the layout of the output file.
|
||
|
||
Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
|
||
below.
|
||
|
||
If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
|
||
linker will place each input section into an identically named output
|
||
section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
|
||
input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
|
||
example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
|
||
in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Output Section Description:: Output section description
|
||
* Output Section Name:: Output section name
|
||
* Output Section Address:: Output section address
|
||
* Input Section:: Input section description
|
||
* Output Section Data:: Output section data
|
||
* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
|
||
* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
|
||
* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
|
||
* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Description, Next: Output Section Name, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.1 Output Section Description
|
||
--------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The full description of an output section looks like this:
|
||
SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
|
||
[AT(LMA)]
|
||
[ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
|
||
[SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
|
||
[CONSTRAINT]
|
||
{
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
||
...
|
||
} [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
|
||
|
||
Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
|
||
attributes.
|
||
|
||
The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
|
||
is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required. The
|
||
line breaks and other white space are optional.
|
||
|
||
Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
|
||
|
||
* a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
|
||
|
||
* an input section description (*note Input Section::)
|
||
|
||
* data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
|
||
|
||
* a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Name, Next: Output Section Address, Prev: Output Section Description, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.2 Output Section Name
|
||
-------------------------
|
||
|
||
The name of the output section is SECTION. SECTION must meet the
|
||
constraints of your output format. In formats which only support a
|
||
limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
|
||
the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
|
||
`.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
|
||
of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
|
||
the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string. A section name
|
||
may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
|
||
any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
|
||
|
||
The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
|
||
Discarding::.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Address, Next: Input Section, Prev: Output Section Name, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.3 Output Section Address
|
||
----------------------------
|
||
|
||
The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
|
||
of the output section. This address is optional, but if it is provided
|
||
then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
|
||
|
||
If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for
|
||
the section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be
|
||
adjusted to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
|
||
alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
|
||
contained within the output section.
|
||
|
||
The output section address heuristic is as follows:
|
||
|
||
* If an output memory REGION is set for the section then it is added
|
||
to this region and its address will be the next free address in
|
||
that region.
|
||
|
||
* If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
|
||
regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with
|
||
the section is selected to contain it. The section's output
|
||
address will be the next free address in that region; *Note
|
||
MEMORY::.
|
||
|
||
* If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
|
||
the output address will be based on the current value of the
|
||
location counter.
|
||
|
||
For example:
|
||
|
||
.text . : { *(.text) }
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
|
||
.text : { *(.text) }
|
||
|
||
are subtly different. The first will set the address of the `.text'
|
||
output section to the current value of the location counter. The
|
||
second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
|
||
to the strictest alignment of any of the `.text' input sections.
|
||
|
||
The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
|
||
For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
|
||
so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
|
||
do something like this:
|
||
.text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
|
||
This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
|
||
aligned upward to the specified value.
|
||
|
||
Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
|
||
location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
|
||
sections are ignored).
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section, Next: Output Section Data, Prev: Output Section Address, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.4 Input Section Description
|
||
-------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The most common output section command is an input section description.
|
||
|
||
The input section description is the most basic linker script
|
||
operation. You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
|
||
your program in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the
|
||
linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
|
||
* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
|
||
* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
|
||
* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
|
||
* Input Section Example:: Input section example
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Basics, Next: Input Section Wildcards, Up: Input Section
|
||
|
||
3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
|
||
............................
|
||
|
||
An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
|
||
by a list of section names in parentheses.
|
||
|
||
The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
|
||
describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
|
||
|
||
The most common input section description is to include all input
|
||
sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
|
||
include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
|
||
*(.text)
|
||
Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude
|
||
a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
|
||
be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
|
||
EXCLUDE_FILE list. For example:
|
||
*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
|
||
will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
|
||
`otherfile.o' to be included.
|
||
|
||
There are two ways to include more than one section:
|
||
*(.text .rdata)
|
||
*(.text) *(.rdata)
|
||
The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
|
||
`.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section. In the
|
||
first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
|
||
they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all `.text'
|
||
input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
|
||
sections.
|
||
|
||
You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
|
||
file. You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
|
||
data that needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
|
||
data.o(.data)
|
||
|
||
To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
|
||
of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
|
||
|
||
Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF
|
||
sections:
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS {
|
||
.text : { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) }
|
||
.text2 : { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) }
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
In this example, the output section `.text' will be comprised of any
|
||
input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
|
||
`SHF_MERGE' and `SHF_STRINGS' are set. The output section `.text2'
|
||
will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text) whose
|
||
section header flag `SHF_WRITE' is clear.
|
||
|
||
You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
|
||
matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
|
||
no whitespace around the colon.
|
||
|
||
`archive:file'
|
||
matches file within archive
|
||
|
||
`archive:'
|
||
matches the whole archive
|
||
|
||
`:file'
|
||
matches file but not one in an archive
|
||
|
||
Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
|
||
wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
|
||
single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
|
||
is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
|
||
`c'. `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
|
||
`EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
|
||
contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
|
||
using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
|
||
|
||
If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
|
||
in the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
|
||
commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
|
||
data.o
|
||
|
||
When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
|
||
and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
|
||
see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
|
||
in an `INPUT' command. If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
|
||
the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
|
||
Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
|
||
not search for the file in the archive search path.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Wildcards, Next: Input Section Common, Prev: Input Section Basics, Up: Input Section
|
||
|
||
3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
|
||
.......................................
|
||
|
||
In an input section description, either the file name or the section
|
||
name or both may be wildcard patterns.
|
||
|
||
The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
|
||
pattern for the file name.
|
||
|
||
The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
|
||
|
||
`*'
|
||
matches any number of characters
|
||
|
||
`?'
|
||
matches any single character
|
||
|
||
`[CHARS]'
|
||
matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
|
||
may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
|
||
match any lower case letter
|
||
|
||
`\'
|
||
quotes the following character
|
||
|
||
When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
|
||
will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
|
||
Unix). A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
|
||
it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
|
||
In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
|
||
|
||
File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
|
||
specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command. The linker
|
||
does not search directories to expand wildcards.
|
||
|
||
If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
|
||
name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
|
||
linker will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
|
||
sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
|
||
`data.o' rule will not be used:
|
||
.data : { *(.data) }
|
||
.data1 : { data.o(.data) }
|
||
|
||
Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
|
||
wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can
|
||
change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
|
||
wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)'). When
|
||
the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
|
||
sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
|
||
file.
|
||
|
||
`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
|
||
difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into descending
|
||
order by alignment before placing them in the output file. Larger
|
||
alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to reduce the
|
||
amount of padding necessary.
|
||
|
||
`SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
|
||
difference is `SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' will sort sections into ascending
|
||
order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in
|
||
the section name before placing them in the output file.
|
||
|
||
`SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
|
||
|
||
When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
|
||
there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
|
||
|
||
1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
|
||
It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
|
||
if two sections have the same name.
|
||
|
||
2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
|
||
It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
|
||
if two sections have the same alignment.
|
||
|
||
3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
|
||
treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
|
||
|
||
4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
|
||
pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
|
||
section pattern).
|
||
|
||
5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
|
||
|
||
When both command line section sorting option and linker script
|
||
section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
|
||
precedence over the command line option.
|
||
|
||
If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
|
||
command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
|
||
as nested sorting command.
|
||
|
||
1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
|
||
alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
|
||
(wildcard section pattern)).
|
||
|
||
2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
|
||
`--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
|
||
(`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
|
||
|
||
If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
|
||
command line option will be ignored.
|
||
|
||
`SORT_NONE' disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
|
||
section sorting option.
|
||
|
||
If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
|
||
the `-M' linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
|
||
precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
|
||
|
||
This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
|
||
files. This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
|
||
sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'. The linker will
|
||
place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
|
||
character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
|
||
`.data' section in `.data'.
|
||
SECTIONS {
|
||
.text : { *(.text) }
|
||
.DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
|
||
.data : { *(.data) }
|
||
.bss : { *(.bss) }
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Common, Next: Input Section Keep, Prev: Input Section Wildcards, Up: Input Section
|
||
|
||
3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
|
||
........................................
|
||
|
||
A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
|
||
file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
|
||
linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
|
||
named `COMMON'.
|
||
|
||
You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
|
||
other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
|
||
particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
|
||
input files are placed in another section.
|
||
|
||
In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
|
||
`.bss' section in the output file. For example:
|
||
.bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
|
||
|
||
Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
|
||
For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
|
||
common symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will
|
||
use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
|
||
In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
|
||
symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols. This permits you to
|
||
map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
|
||
locations.
|
||
|
||
You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts. This
|
||
notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Keep, Next: Input Section Example, Prev: Input Section Common, Up: Input Section
|
||
|
||
3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
|
||
............................................
|
||
|
||
When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
|
||
often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated. This is
|
||
accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
|
||
`KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Example, Prev: Input Section Keep, Up: Input Section
|
||
|
||
3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
|
||
.............................
|
||
|
||
The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
|
||
to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
|
||
start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
|
||
All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
|
||
same output section. All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
|
||
output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
|
||
All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
|
||
are written to output section `outputc'.
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS {
|
||
outputa 0x10000 :
|
||
{
|
||
all.o
|
||
foo.o (.input1)
|
||
}
|
||
outputb :
|
||
{
|
||
foo.o (.input2)
|
||
foo1.o (.input1)
|
||
}
|
||
outputc :
|
||
{
|
||
*(.input1)
|
||
*(.input2)
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Data, Next: Output Section Keywords, Prev: Input Section, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.5 Output Section Data
|
||
-------------------------
|
||
|
||
You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
|
||
`BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
|
||
command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
|
||
providing the value to store (*note Expressions::). The value of the
|
||
expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
|
||
|
||
The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
|
||
four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the bytes, the
|
||
location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
|
||
|
||
For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
|
||
value of the symbol `addr':
|
||
BYTE(1)
|
||
LONG(addr)
|
||
|
||
When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
|
||
they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and target
|
||
are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case `QUAD'
|
||
stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
|
||
bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
|
||
|
||
If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
|
||
endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
|
||
endianness. When the object file format does not have an explicit
|
||
endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
|
||
stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
|
||
|
||
Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
|
||
between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
|
||
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
|
||
whereas this will work:
|
||
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
|
||
|
||
You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
|
||
current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
|
||
otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
|
||
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
|
||
with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary. A `FILL'
|
||
statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
|
||
the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
|
||
you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
|
||
section.
|
||
|
||
This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
|
||
value `0x90':
|
||
FILL(0x90909090)
|
||
|
||
The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
|
||
attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
|
||
`FILL' command, rather than the entire section. If both are used, the
|
||
`FILL' command takes precedence. *Note Output Section Fill::, for
|
||
details on the fill expression.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Keywords, Next: Output Section Discarding, Prev: Output Section Data, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
|
||
-----------------------------
|
||
|
||
There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
|
||
commands.
|
||
|
||
`CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
|
||
The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
|
||
file. The name of each symbol will be the name of the
|
||
corresponding input file. The section of each symbol will be the
|
||
output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
|
||
appears.
|
||
|
||
This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
|
||
normally used for any other object file format.
|
||
|
||
`CONSTRUCTORS'
|
||
When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
|
||
unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
|
||
destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
|
||
arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
|
||
automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
|
||
name. For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
|
||
tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
|
||
section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears. The
|
||
`CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
|
||
|
||
The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
|
||
constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
|
||
Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
|
||
end of the global destructors. The first word in the list is the
|
||
number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
|
||
destructor, followed by a zero word. The compiler must arrange to
|
||
actually run the code. For these object file formats GNU C++
|
||
normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
|
||
`__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
|
||
`main'. GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
|
||
`atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
|
||
|
||
For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
|
||
arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
|
||
addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
|
||
and `.dtors' sections. Placing the following sequence into your
|
||
linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
|
||
runtime code expects to see.
|
||
|
||
__CTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
||
LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
||
*(.ctors)
|
||
LONG(0)
|
||
__CTOR_END__ = .;
|
||
__DTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
||
LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
||
*(.dtors)
|
||
LONG(0)
|
||
__DTOR_END__ = .;
|
||
|
||
If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
|
||
which provides some control over the order in which global
|
||
constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
|
||
to ensure that they are executed in the correct order. When using
|
||
the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
|
||
instead. When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
|
||
`*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
|
||
just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
|
||
|
||
Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
|
||
automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
|
||
them. However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
|
||
and writing your own linker scripts.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Discarding, Next: Output Section Attributes, Prev: Output Section Keywords, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
|
||
-------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
|
||
for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
|
||
present in any of the input files. For example:
|
||
.foo : { *(.foo) }
|
||
will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
|
||
`.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
|
||
are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate space in
|
||
an output section will also create the output section.
|
||
|
||
The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
|
||
Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
|
||
defines symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will
|
||
obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
|
||
section is discarded.
|
||
|
||
The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
|
||
input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
|
||
section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Attributes, Next: Overlay Description, Prev: Output Section Discarding, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
|
||
-------------------------------
|
||
|
||
We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
|
||
like this:
|
||
|
||
SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
|
||
[AT(LMA)]
|
||
[ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
|
||
[SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
|
||
[CONSTRAINT]
|
||
{
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
||
...
|
||
} [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
|
||
|
||
We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND. In this section we will describe the remaining
|
||
section attributes.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Output Section Type:: Output section type
|
||
* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
|
||
* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
|
||
* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
|
||
* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
|
||
* Output Section Region:: Output section region
|
||
* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
|
||
* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Type, Next: Output Section LMA, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
||
|
||
3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
|
||
...........................
|
||
|
||
Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
|
||
parentheses. The following types are defined:
|
||
|
||
`NOLOAD'
|
||
The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
|
||
be loaded into memory when the program is run.
|
||
|
||
`DSECT'
|
||
`COPY'
|
||
`INFO'
|
||
`OVERLAY'
|
||
These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
|
||
rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
|
||
marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
|
||
section when the program is run.
|
||
|
||
The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
|
||
the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
|
||
the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
|
||
section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
|
||
loaded when the program is run.
|
||
SECTIONS {
|
||
ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section LMA, Next: Forced Output Alignment, Prev: Output Section Type, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
||
|
||
3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
|
||
..........................
|
||
|
||
Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
|
||
*Note Basic Script Concepts::. The virtual address is specified by the
|
||
*note Output Section Address:: described earlier. The load address is
|
||
specified by the `AT' or `AT>' keywords. Specifying a load address is
|
||
optional.
|
||
|
||
The `AT' keyword takes an expression as an argument. This specifies
|
||
the exact load address of the section. The `AT>' keyword takes the
|
||
name of a memory region as an argument. *Note MEMORY::. The load
|
||
address of the section is set to the next free address in the region,
|
||
aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
|
||
|
||
If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
|
||
the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the load
|
||
address:
|
||
|
||
* If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
|
||
the LMA address as well.
|
||
|
||
* If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
|
||
|
||
* Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible with
|
||
the current section, and this region contains at least one
|
||
section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the VMA and
|
||
LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of the
|
||
last section in the located region.
|
||
|
||
* If no memory regions have been declared then a default region that
|
||
covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
|
||
|
||
* If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
|
||
section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
|
||
|
||
This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
|
||
example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
|
||
called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
|
||
loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
|
||
`0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
|
||
`0x3000'. The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
|
||
shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
.text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
|
||
.mdata 0x2000 :
|
||
AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
|
||
{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; }
|
||
.bss 0x3000 :
|
||
{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
|
||
with this linker script would include something like the following, to
|
||
copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
|
||
Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
|
||
linker script.
|
||
|
||
extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
|
||
char *src = &_etext;
|
||
char *dst = &_data;
|
||
|
||
/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
|
||
while (dst < &_edata)
|
||
*dst++ = *src++;
|
||
|
||
/* Zero bss. */
|
||
for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
|
||
*dst = 0;
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Forced Output Alignment, Next: Forced Input Alignment, Prev: Output Section LMA, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
||
|
||
3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
|
||
...............................
|
||
|
||
You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
|
||
alternative you can force the output section alignment to the maximum
|
||
alignment of all its input sections with ALIGN_WITH_INPUT. The
|
||
alignment forced by ALIGN_WITH_INPUT is used even in case the load and
|
||
virtual memory regions are different.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Forced Input Alignment, Next: Output Section Constraint, Prev: Forced Output Alignment, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
||
|
||
3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
|
||
..............................
|
||
|
||
You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
|
||
SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
|
||
sections, whether larger or smaller.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Constraint, Next: Output Section Region, Prev: Forced Input Alignment, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
||
|
||
3.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint
|
||
.................................
|
||
|
||
You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of
|
||
its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
|
||
read-write by using the keyword `ONLY_IF_RO' and `ONLY_IF_RW'
|
||
respectively.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Region, Next: Output Section Phdr, Prev: Output Section Constraint, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
||
|
||
3.6.8.6 Output Section Region
|
||
.............................
|
||
|
||
You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
|
||
using `>REGION'. *Note MEMORY::.
|
||
|
||
Here is a simple example:
|
||
MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
|
||
SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Phdr, Next: Output Section Fill, Prev: Output Section Region, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
||
|
||
3.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr
|
||
...........................
|
||
|
||
You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
|
||
using `:PHDR'. *Note PHDRS::. If a section is assigned to one or more
|
||
segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
|
||
those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
|
||
You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
|
||
segment at all.
|
||
|
||
Here is a simple example:
|
||
PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
|
||
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Fill, Prev: Output Section Phdr, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
||
|
||
3.6.8.8 Output Section Fill
|
||
...........................
|
||
|
||
You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
|
||
FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::). Any otherwise
|
||
unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
|
||
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
|
||
filled with the value, repeated as necessary. If the fill expression
|
||
is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
|
||
and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
|
||
hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern; Leading zeros
|
||
become part of the pattern too. For all other cases, including extra
|
||
parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
|
||
significant bytes of the value of the expression. In all cases, the
|
||
number is big-endian.
|
||
|
||
You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
|
||
output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
|
||
|
||
Here is a simple example:
|
||
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Overlay Description, Prev: Output Section Attributes, Up: SECTIONS
|
||
|
||
3.6.9 Overlay Description
|
||
-------------------------
|
||
|
||
An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
|
||
are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
|
||
the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
|
||
copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
|
||
required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
|
||
can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
|
||
than another.
|
||
|
||
Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command. The `OVERLAY'
|
||
command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
|
||
description. The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
|
||
OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
|
||
{
|
||
SECNAME1
|
||
{
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
||
...
|
||
} [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
|
||
SECNAME2
|
||
{
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
||
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
||
...
|
||
} [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
|
||
...
|
||
} [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
|
||
|
||
Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
|
||
section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above). The section
|
||
definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
|
||
within the general `SECTIONS' construct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
|
||
no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
|
||
an `OVERLAY'.
|
||
|
||
The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The
|
||
load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
|
||
consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
|
||
`OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
|
||
address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
|
||
address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
|
||
location counter).
|
||
|
||
If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there are any references
|
||
among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the
|
||
sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense
|
||
for one section to refer directly to another. *Note NOCROSSREFS:
|
||
Miscellaneous Commands.
|
||
|
||
For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
|
||
provides two symbols. The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
|
||
the starting load address of the section. The symbol
|
||
`__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
|
||
section. Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
|
||
identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
|
||
to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
|
||
|
||
At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
|
||
to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
|
||
section.
|
||
|
||
Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
|
||
`SECTIONS' construct.
|
||
OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
|
||
{
|
||
.text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
|
||
.text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
|
||
}
|
||
This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
|
||
0x1000. `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
|
||
be loaded immediately after `.text0'. The following symbols will be
|
||
defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
|
||
`__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
|
||
|
||
C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
|
||
like the following.
|
||
|
||
extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
|
||
memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
|
||
&__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
|
||
|
||
Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
|
||
everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
|
||
example could have been written identically as follows.
|
||
|
||
.text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
|
||
PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
|
||
PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
|
||
.text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
|
||
PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
|
||
PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
|
||
. = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: MEMORY, Next: PHDRS, Prev: SECTIONS, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.7 MEMORY Command
|
||
==================
|
||
|
||
The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
|
||
memory. You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
|
||
|
||
The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
|
||
memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
|
||
may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
|
||
can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
|
||
set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
|
||
regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
|
||
around to fit into the available regions.
|
||
|
||
A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
|
||
However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
|
||
wish. The syntax is:
|
||
MEMORY
|
||
{
|
||
NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
|
||
The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script. Region
|
||
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
|
||
symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region must
|
||
have a distinct name within the `MEMORY' command. However you can add
|
||
later alias names to existing memory regions with the *Note
|
||
REGION_ALIAS:: command.
|
||
|
||
The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
|
||
whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
|
||
not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in *Note
|
||
SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
|
||
section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
|
||
the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
|
||
them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
|
||
|
||
The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
|
||
`R'
|
||
Read-only section
|
||
|
||
`W'
|
||
Read/write section
|
||
|
||
`X'
|
||
Executable section
|
||
|
||
`A'
|
||
Allocatable section
|
||
|
||
`I'
|
||
Initialized section
|
||
|
||
`L'
|
||
Same as `I'
|
||
|
||
`!'
|
||
Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
|
||
|
||
If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
|
||
`!', it will be placed in the memory region. The `!' attribute
|
||
reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
|
||
memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
|
||
|
||
The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
|
||
memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
|
||
cannot involve any symbols. The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
|
||
`org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
|
||
|
||
The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
|
||
As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
|
||
and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword `LENGTH' may be
|
||
abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
|
||
|
||
In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
|
||
regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
|
||
and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes. The linker
|
||
will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
|
||
explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
|
||
executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
|
||
explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
|
||
|
||
MEMORY
|
||
{
|
||
rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
|
||
ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
|
||
specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
|
||
output section attribute. For example, if you have a memory region
|
||
named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
|
||
*Note Output Section Region::. If no address was specified for the
|
||
output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
|
||
address within the memory region. If the combined output sections
|
||
directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
|
||
will issue an error message.
|
||
|
||
It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
|
||
expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
|
||
|
||
_fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: PHDRS, Next: VERSION, Prev: MEMORY, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.8 PHDRS Command
|
||
=================
|
||
|
||
The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
|
||
"segments". The program headers describe how the program should be
|
||
loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the `objdump'
|
||
program with the `-p' option.
|
||
|
||
When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
|
||
reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
|
||
program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
|
||
This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
|
||
interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
|
||
|
||
The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
|
||
However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
|
||
precisely. You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose. When the
|
||
linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
|
||
create any program headers other than the ones specified.
|
||
|
||
The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
|
||
generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
|
||
ignore `PHDRS'.
|
||
|
||
This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command. The words `PHDRS',
|
||
`FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
|
||
|
||
PHDRS
|
||
{
|
||
NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
|
||
[ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
|
||
linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program header
|
||
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
|
||
symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header must
|
||
have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it is
|
||
usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
|
||
|
||
Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
|
||
system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
|
||
specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
|
||
sections in the segments. You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
|
||
to place a section in a particular segment. *Note Output Section
|
||
Phdr::.
|
||
|
||
It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
|
||
merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
|
||
repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
|
||
section.
|
||
|
||
If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
|
||
the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
|
||
specify `:PHDR' in the same segments. This is for convenience, since
|
||
generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
|
||
segment. You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
|
||
the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
|
||
|
||
You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords after the program
|
||
header type to further describe the contents of the segment. The
|
||
`FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF file
|
||
header. The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include the
|
||
ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable segment
|
||
(`PT_LOAD'), all prior loadable segments must have one of these
|
||
keywords.
|
||
|
||
The TYPE may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
|
||
value of the keyword.
|
||
|
||
`PT_NULL' (0)
|
||
Indicates an unused program header.
|
||
|
||
`PT_LOAD' (1)
|
||
Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
|
||
loaded from the file.
|
||
|
||
`PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
|
||
Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
|
||
|
||
`PT_INTERP' (3)
|
||
Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
|
||
be found.
|
||
|
||
`PT_NOTE' (4)
|
||
Indicates a segment holding note information.
|
||
|
||
`PT_SHLIB' (5)
|
||
A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
|
||
ELF ABI.
|
||
|
||
`PT_PHDR' (6)
|
||
Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
|
||
|
||
EXPRESSION
|
||
An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This
|
||
may be used for types not defined above.
|
||
|
||
You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
|
||
address in memory by using an `AT' expression. This is identical to the
|
||
`AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
|
||
LMA::). The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
|
||
section attribute.
|
||
|
||
The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
|
||
which comprise the segment. You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
|
||
explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of FLAGS must be an
|
||
integer. It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
|
||
|
||
Here is an example of `PHDRS'. This shows a typical set of program
|
||
headers used on a native ELF system.
|
||
|
||
PHDRS
|
||
{
|
||
headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
|
||
interp PT_INTERP ;
|
||
text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
|
||
data PT_LOAD ;
|
||
dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
. = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
|
||
.interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
|
||
.text : { *(.text) } :text
|
||
.rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
|
||
...
|
||
. = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
|
||
.data : { *(.data) } :data
|
||
.dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: VERSION, Next: Expressions, Prev: PHDRS, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.9 VERSION Command
|
||
===================
|
||
|
||
The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
|
||
only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
|
||
symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
|
||
a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
|
||
shared library.
|
||
|
||
You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
|
||
or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You
|
||
can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
|
||
|
||
The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
|
||
VERSION { version-script-commands }
|
||
|
||
The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
|
||
by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
|
||
version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
|
||
version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
|
||
version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
|
||
scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
|
||
library.
|
||
|
||
The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
|
||
few examples.
|
||
|
||
VERS_1.1 {
|
||
global:
|
||
foo1;
|
||
local:
|
||
old*;
|
||
original*;
|
||
new*;
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
VERS_1.2 {
|
||
foo2;
|
||
} VERS_1.1;
|
||
|
||
VERS_2.0 {
|
||
bar1; bar2;
|
||
extern "C++" {
|
||
ns::*;
|
||
"f(int, double)";
|
||
};
|
||
} VERS_1.2;
|
||
|
||
This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
|
||
version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies. The
|
||
script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'. It reduces a number of
|
||
symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
|
||
shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
|
||
symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
|
||
The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
|
||
when matching filenames (also known as "globbing"). However, if you
|
||
specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
|
||
as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
|
||
|
||
Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'. This node depends
|
||
upon `VERS_1.1'. The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
|
||
node `VERS_1.2'.
|
||
|
||
Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'. This node
|
||
depends upon `VERS_1.2'. The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
|
||
`bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
|
||
|
||
When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
|
||
specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
|
||
unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
|
||
unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
|
||
somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
|
||
wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
|
||
wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
|
||
set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
|
||
ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
|
||
|
||
The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
|
||
what they might suggest to the person reading them. The `2.0' version
|
||
could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'. However,
|
||
this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
|
||
|
||
Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
|
||
the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
|
||
symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
|
||
which won't.
|
||
|
||
{ global: foo; bar; local: *; };
|
||
|
||
When you link an application against a shared library that has
|
||
versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
|
||
symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
|
||
each shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
|
||
loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
|
||
linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
|
||
application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
|
||
way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
|
||
all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
|
||
search for each symbol reference.
|
||
|
||
The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
|
||
doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
|
||
that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
|
||
functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
|
||
the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
|
||
required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
|
||
that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
|
||
versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
|
||
the libraries being used with the application are too old.
|
||
|
||
There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
|
||
first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
|
||
source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
|
||
script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
|
||
maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
|
||
__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
|
||
in the C source file. This renames the function `original_foo' to
|
||
be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'. The
|
||
`local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
|
||
from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
|
||
version script.
|
||
|
||
The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
|
||
function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
|
||
an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
|
||
version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
|
||
linked against the old interface to continue to function.
|
||
|
||
To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
|
||
file. Here is an example:
|
||
|
||
__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
|
||
__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
|
||
__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@VERS_1.2");
|
||
__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
|
||
|
||
In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
|
||
unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains
|
||
this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
|
||
`old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
|
||
|
||
When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
|
||
be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
|
||
this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
|
||
type of `.symver' directive. You can only declare one version of a
|
||
symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
|
||
have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
|
||
|
||
If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
|
||
within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
|
||
(i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
|
||
specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
|
||
|
||
You can also specify the language in the version script:
|
||
|
||
VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
|
||
|
||
The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'. The linker will
|
||
iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
|
||
according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
|
||
`version-script-commands'. The default `lang' is `C'.
|
||
|
||
Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
|
||
described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
|
||
or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
|
||
the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
|
||
whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
|
||
cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler might
|
||
change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
|
||
check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
|
||
when you upgrade.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Expressions, Next: Implicit Linker Scripts, Prev: VERSION, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
||
==================================
|
||
|
||
The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
|
||
that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
|
||
expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
|
||
host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
|
||
|
||
You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
|
||
|
||
The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
|
||
in expressions.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Constants:: Constants
|
||
* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
|
||
* Symbols:: Symbol Names
|
||
* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
|
||
* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
|
||
* Operators:: Operators
|
||
* Evaluation:: Evaluation
|
||
* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
|
||
* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Constants, Next: Symbolic Constants, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.1 Constants
|
||
----------------
|
||
|
||
All constants are integers.
|
||
|
||
As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
|
||
octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
|
||
Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of `h' or `H' for
|
||
hexadecimal, `o' or `O' for octal, `b' or `B' for binary and `d' or `D'
|
||
for decimal. Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is
|
||
considered to be decimal.
|
||
|
||
In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
|
||
constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively. For example, the
|
||
following all refer to the same quantity:
|
||
|
||
_fourk_1 = 4K;
|
||
_fourk_2 = 4096;
|
||
_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
|
||
_fourk_4 = 10000o;
|
||
|
||
Note - the `K' and `M' suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with
|
||
the base suffixes mentioned above.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Symbolic Constants, Next: Symbols, Prev: Constants, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.2 Symbolic Constants
|
||
-------------------------
|
||
|
||
It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of the
|
||
`CONSTANT(NAME)' operator, where NAME is one of:
|
||
|
||
`MAXPAGESIZE'
|
||
The target's maximum page size.
|
||
|
||
`COMMONPAGESIZE'
|
||
The target's default page size.
|
||
|
||
So for example:
|
||
|
||
.text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) }
|
||
|
||
will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
|
||
supported by the target.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Symbols, Next: Orphan Sections, Prev: Symbolic Constants, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.3 Symbol Names
|
||
-------------------
|
||
|
||
Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
|
||
and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
|
||
Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
|
||
specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
|
||
keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
|
||
"SECTION" = 9;
|
||
"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
|
||
|
||
Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
|
||
safest to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, `A-B' is one
|
||
symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Orphan Sections, Next: Location Counter, Prev: Symbols, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.4 Orphan Sections
|
||
----------------------
|
||
|
||
Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
|
||
explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script. The
|
||
linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
|
||
to guess as to where they should be placed. The linker uses a simple
|
||
heuristic to do this. It attempts to place orphan sections after
|
||
non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
|
||
loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If there is not enough room to do this
|
||
then it places at the end of the file.
|
||
|
||
For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
|
||
as well as section flag.
|
||
|
||
If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
|
||
the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
|
||
__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
|
||
section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
|
||
orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
|
||
representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Location Counter, Next: Operators, Prev: Orphan Sections, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.5 The Location Counter
|
||
---------------------------
|
||
|
||
The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
|
||
output location counter. Since the `.' always refers to a location in
|
||
an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
|
||
`SECTIONS' command. The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
|
||
ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
|
||
|
||
Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
|
||
moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
|
||
location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
|
||
and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
|
||
creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
output :
|
||
{
|
||
file1(.text)
|
||
. = . + 1000;
|
||
file2(.text)
|
||
. += 1000;
|
||
file3(.text)
|
||
} = 0x12345678;
|
||
}
|
||
In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
|
||
at the beginning of the output section `output'. It is followed by a
|
||
1000 byte gap. Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
|
||
with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
|
||
The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
|
||
(*note Output Section Fill::).
|
||
|
||
Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
|
||
current containing object. Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
|
||
whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
|
||
If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
|
||
byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
|
||
Thus in a script like this:
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
. = 0x100
|
||
.text: {
|
||
*(.text)
|
||
. = 0x200
|
||
}
|
||
. = 0x500
|
||
.data: {
|
||
*(.data)
|
||
. += 0x600
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
|
||
a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
|
||
`.text' input sections to fill this area. (If there is too much data,
|
||
an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
|
||
backwards). The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
|
||
an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
|
||
the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
|
||
section itself.
|
||
|
||
Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
|
||
output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
|
||
needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
start_of_text = . ;
|
||
.text: { *(.text) }
|
||
end_of_text = . ;
|
||
|
||
start_of_data = . ;
|
||
.data: { *(.data) }
|
||
end_of_data = . ;
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
|
||
mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
|
||
`.text' and `.data'. You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
|
||
on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
|
||
particular significance to the linker. As well, the linker doesn't
|
||
associate the above symbol names with their sections. Instead, it
|
||
assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
|
||
output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
|
||
I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
|
||
script was written as follows:
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
start_of_text = . ;
|
||
.text: { *(.text) }
|
||
end_of_text = . ;
|
||
|
||
start_of_data = . ;
|
||
.rodata: { *(.rodata) }
|
||
.data: { *(.data) }
|
||
end_of_data = . ;
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
|
||
`start_of_data'. One way to influence the orphan section placement is
|
||
to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
|
||
assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
|
||
section and thus should be grouped with that section. So you could
|
||
write:
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
start_of_text = . ;
|
||
.text: { *(.text) }
|
||
end_of_text = . ;
|
||
|
||
. = . ;
|
||
start_of_data = . ;
|
||
.data: { *(.data) }
|
||
end_of_data = . ;
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
|
||
`end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Operators, Next: Evaluation, Prev: Location Counter, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.6 Operators
|
||
----------------
|
||
|
||
The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
|
||
the standard bindings and precedence levels:
|
||
precedence associativity Operators Notes
|
||
(highest)
|
||
1 left ! - ~ (1)
|
||
2 left * / %
|
||
3 left + -
|
||
4 left >> <<
|
||
5 left == != > < <= >=
|
||
6 left &
|
||
7 left |
|
||
8 left &&
|
||
9 left ||
|
||
10 right ? :
|
||
11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
|
||
(lowest)
|
||
Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Evaluation, Next: Expression Section, Prev: Operators, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.7 Evaluation
|
||
-----------------
|
||
|
||
The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
|
||
an expression when absolutely necessary.
|
||
|
||
The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
|
||
address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
|
||
regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
|
||
as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
|
||
|
||
However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
|
||
until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
|
||
other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
|
||
for use in the symbol assignment expression.
|
||
|
||
The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
|
||
assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
|
||
allocation.
|
||
|
||
Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
|
||
`.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
|
||
|
||
If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
|
||
available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
|
||
following
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
.text 9+this_isnt_constant :
|
||
{ *(.text) }
|
||
}
|
||
will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
|
||
address'.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Expression Section, Next: Builtin Functions, Prev: Evaluation, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.8 The Section of an Expression
|
||
-----------------------------------
|
||
|
||
Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
|
||
relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
|
||
using the `-r' option, a further link operation may change the value of
|
||
a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute symbol will
|
||
retain the same value throughout any further link operations.
|
||
|
||
Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
|
||
section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
|
||
address, such as `ADDR', `LOADADDR', `ORIGIN' and `SEGMENT_START'.
|
||
Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin functions that return a
|
||
non-address value, such as `LENGTH'. One complication is that unless
|
||
you set `LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")' (*note Miscellaneous Commands::),
|
||
numbers and absolute symbols are treated differently depending on their
|
||
location, for compatibility with older versions of `ld'. Expressions
|
||
appearing outside an output section definition treat all numbers as
|
||
absolute addresses. Expressions appearing inside an output section
|
||
definition treat absolute symbols as numbers. If `LD_FEATURE
|
||
("SANE_EXPR")' is given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply
|
||
treated as numbers everywhere.
|
||
|
||
In the following simple example,
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
. = 0x100;
|
||
__executable_start = 0x100;
|
||
.data :
|
||
{
|
||
. = 0x10;
|
||
__data_start = 0x10;
|
||
*(.data)
|
||
}
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
both `.' and `__executable_start' are set to the absolute address
|
||
0x100 in the first two assignments, then both `.' and `__data_start'
|
||
are set to 0x10 relative to the `.data' section in the second two
|
||
assignments.
|
||
|
||
For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
|
||
addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
|
||
|
||
* Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
|
||
operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
|
||
absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
|
||
|
||
* Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on
|
||
two relative addresses in the same section or between one relative
|
||
address and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the
|
||
address(es).
|
||
|
||
* Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses
|
||
not in the same section, or between a relative address and an
|
||
absolute address, first convert any non-absolute term to an
|
||
absolute address before applying the operator.
|
||
|
||
The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
|
||
|
||
* An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
|
||
|
||
* The result of comparisons, `&&' and `||' is also a number.
|
||
|
||
* The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
|
||
relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
|
||
(after above conversions) is also a number.
|
||
|
||
* The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
|
||
relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
|
||
section as the relative operand(s).
|
||
|
||
* The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
|
||
conversions) is an absolute address.
|
||
|
||
You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
|
||
to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
|
||
create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
|
||
section `.data':
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
.data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
|
||
}
|
||
If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
|
||
`.data' section.
|
||
|
||
Using `LOADADDR' also forces an expression absolute, since this
|
||
particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Builtin Functions, Prev: Expression Section, Up: Expressions
|
||
|
||
3.10.9 Builtin Functions
|
||
------------------------
|
||
|
||
The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
|
||
use in linker script expressions.
|
||
|
||
`ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
|
||
Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
|
||
value of the expression EXP. Primarily useful to assign an
|
||
absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
|
||
symbol values are normally section relative. *Note Expression
|
||
Section::.
|
||
|
||
`ADDR(SECTION)'
|
||
Return the address (VMA) of the named SECTION. Your script must
|
||
previously have defined the location of that section. In the
|
||
following example, `start_of_output_1', `symbol_1' and `symbol_2'
|
||
are assigned equivalent values, except that `symbol_1' will be
|
||
relative to the `.output1' section while the other two will be
|
||
absolute:
|
||
SECTIONS { ...
|
||
.output1 :
|
||
{
|
||
start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
.output :
|
||
{
|
||
symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
|
||
symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
|
||
}
|
||
... }
|
||
|
||
`ALIGN(ALIGN)'
|
||
`ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
|
||
Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
|
||
to the next ALIGN boundary. The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
|
||
change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
|
||
on it. The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
|
||
be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
|
||
ALIGN)').
|
||
|
||
Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
|
||
next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
|
||
variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
|
||
input sections:
|
||
SECTIONS { ...
|
||
.data ALIGN(0x2000): {
|
||
*(.data)
|
||
variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
|
||
}
|
||
... }
|
||
The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
|
||
location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
|
||
attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
|
||
Address::). The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
|
||
value of a symbol.
|
||
|
||
The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
|
||
|
||
`ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
|
||
Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
|
||
section has been allocated. If the section has not been allocated
|
||
when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
|
||
following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
|
||
stored as the first value in that section.
|
||
SECTIONS{ ...
|
||
.output {
|
||
LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
... }
|
||
|
||
`BLOCK(EXP)'
|
||
This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
|
||
scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an
|
||
output section.
|
||
|
||
`DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
|
||
This is equivalent to either
|
||
(ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
|
||
or
|
||
(ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
|
||
depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
|
||
pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
|
||
expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not. If the
|
||
latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
|
||
memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
|
||
bytes in the on-disk file.
|
||
|
||
This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
|
||
not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
|
||
script. COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
|
||
should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
|
||
for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
. = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
|
||
|
||
`DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
|
||
This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
|
||
evaluation purposes.
|
||
|
||
. = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
|
||
|
||
`DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
|
||
This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
|
||
option is used. Second argument is returned. When `-z relro'
|
||
option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
|
||
otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
|
||
aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
|
||
target. If present in the linker script, it must always come in
|
||
between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
|
||
|
||
. = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
|
||
|
||
`DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
|
||
Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
|
||
defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
|
||
return 0. You can use this function to provide default values for
|
||
symbols. For example, the following script fragment shows how to
|
||
set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
|
||
section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
|
||
is preserved:
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS { ...
|
||
.text : {
|
||
begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
...
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
`LENGTH(MEMORY)'
|
||
Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
|
||
|
||
`LOADADDR(SECTION)'
|
||
Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION. (*note Output
|
||
Section LMA::).
|
||
|
||
`LOG2CEIL(EXP)'
|
||
Return the binary logarithm of EXP rounded towards infinity.
|
||
`LOG2CEIL(0)' returns 0.
|
||
|
||
`MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
|
||
Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
|
||
|
||
`MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
|
||
Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
|
||
|
||
`NEXT(EXP)'
|
||
Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
|
||
This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
|
||
the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
|
||
file, the two functions are equivalent.
|
||
|
||
`ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
|
||
Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
|
||
|
||
`SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
|
||
Return the base address of the named SEGMENT. If an explicit
|
||
value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
|
||
`-T' option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
|
||
will be DEFAULT. At present, the `-T' command-line option can
|
||
only be used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and
|
||
"bss" sections, but you can use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment
|
||
name.
|
||
|
||
`SIZEOF(SECTION)'
|
||
Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
|
||
been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
|
||
evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following
|
||
example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
|
||
SECTIONS{ ...
|
||
.output {
|
||
.start = . ;
|
||
...
|
||
.end = . ;
|
||
}
|
||
symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
|
||
symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
|
||
... }
|
||
|
||
`SIZEOF_HEADERS'
|
||
`sizeof_headers'
|
||
Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
|
||
information which appears at the start of the output file. You
|
||
can use this number when setting the start address of the first
|
||
section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
|
||
|
||
When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
|
||
`SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
|
||
number of program headers before it has determined all the section
|
||
addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
|
||
additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
|
||
room for program headers'. To avoid this error, you must avoid
|
||
using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
|
||
script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
|
||
headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
|
||
`PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Implicit Linker Scripts, Prev: Expressions, Up: Scripts
|
||
|
||
3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
|
||
============================
|
||
|
||
If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
|
||
an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
|
||
linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
|
||
linker will report an error.
|
||
|
||
An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
|
||
|
||
Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
|
||
assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
|
||
|
||
Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
|
||
read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
|
||
script was read. This can affect archive searching.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Machine Dependent, Next: BFD, Prev: Scripts, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
4 Machine Dependent Features
|
||
****************************
|
||
|
||
`ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
|
||
describe them. Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
|
||
not listed.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
|
||
* H8/300:: `ld' and the H8/300
|
||
|
||
* i960:: `ld' and the Intel 960 family
|
||
|
||
* M68HC11/68HC12:: `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
||
|
||
* ARM:: `ld' and the ARM family
|
||
|
||
* HPPA ELF32:: `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
|
||
|
||
* M68K:: `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
|
||
|
||
* MIPS:: `ld' and the MIPS family
|
||
|
||
* MMIX:: `ld' and MMIX
|
||
|
||
* MSP430:: `ld' and MSP430
|
||
|
||
* PowerPC ELF32:: `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
||
|
||
* PowerPC64 ELF64:: `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
||
|
||
* SPU ELF:: `ld' and SPU ELF Support
|
||
|
||
* TI COFF:: `ld' and TI COFF
|
||
|
||
* WIN32:: `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
||
|
||
* Xtensa:: `ld' and Xtensa Processors
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: H8/300, Next: i960, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
|
||
=======================
|
||
|
||
For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
|
||
specify the `--relax' command-line option.
|
||
|
||
_relaxing address modes_
|
||
`ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
|
||
within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
|
||
relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
|
||
|
||
_synthesizing instructions_
|
||
`ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
|
||
absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
|
||
changes them to use the eight-bit address form. (That is: the
|
||
linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
|
||
address AA is in the top page of memory).
|
||
|
||
`ld' finds all `mov' instructions which use the register indirect
|
||
with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
|
||
displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to
|
||
use the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns
|
||
`mov.b `@'D:32,ERx' into `mov.b `@'D:16,ERx' whenever the
|
||
displacement D is in the 16 bit signed integer range. Only
|
||
implemented in ELF-format ld).
|
||
|
||
_bit manipulation instructions_
|
||
`ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
|
||
biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
|
||
bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
|
||
to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
|
||
address form. (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
|
||
into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
|
||
page of memory).
|
||
|
||
_system control instructions_
|
||
`ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
|
||
absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
|
||
changes them to use 16 bit address form. (That is: the linker
|
||
turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
|
||
address AA is in the top page of memory).
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: i960, Next: M68HC11/68HC12, Prev: H8/300, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
|
||
=================================
|
||
|
||
You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
|
||
the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
|
||
specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
|
||
instructions in the input files. It also modifies the linker's search
|
||
strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
|
||
specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
|
||
loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
|
||
|
||
For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
|
||
`-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
|
||
any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
|
||
|
||
try
|
||
libtry.a
|
||
tryca
|
||
libtryca.a
|
||
|
||
The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
|
||
two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
|
||
|
||
You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
|
||
the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
|
||
each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
|
||
specifies a library.
|
||
|
||
`ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family. If you
|
||
specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
|
||
targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
|
||
relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively. `ld' also turns
|
||
`cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
|
||
target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
|
||
not itself call any subroutines).
|
||
|
||
The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
|
||
erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by
|
||
default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can
|
||
be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
|
||
unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
|
||
|
||
The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for
|
||
further details.
|
||
|
||
The `--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
|
||
adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: M68HC11/68HC12, Next: ARM, Prev: i960, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
||
====================================================
|
||
|
||
4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
|
||
-----------------------
|
||
|
||
For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
|
||
when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
|
||
|
||
_relaxing address modes_
|
||
`ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
|
||
within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
|
||
relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
|
||
|
||
`ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
|
||
transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
|
||
page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
|
||
|
||
_relaxing gcc instruction group_
|
||
When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
|
||
instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
|
||
addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
|
||
instructions.
|
||
|
||
|
||
4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
|
||
---------------------------
|
||
|
||
For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
|
||
function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
|
||
the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
|
||
instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
|
||
pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
|
||
function trampoline.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: ARM, Next: HPPA ELF32, Prev: M68HC11/68HC12, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.4 `ld' and the ARM family
|
||
===========================
|
||
|
||
For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
|
||
between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
|
||
been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
|
||
option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
|
||
libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
|
||
option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
|
||
given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
|
||
which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
|
||
the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
|
||
non-interworking aware Thumb code.
|
||
|
||
The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
|
||
switch, in that it sets the program's starting address. But it also
|
||
sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
|
||
a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
|
||
straight away.
|
||
|
||
The `--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables' switch is specifying, that
|
||
the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
|
||
element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
|
||
import tables. By default this option is turned off.
|
||
|
||
The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
|
||
executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
|
||
The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
|
||
|
||
The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
|
||
`.init_array' section. It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
|
||
`R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target. The `--target1-rel' and
|
||
`--target1-abs' switches override the default.
|
||
|
||
The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
|
||
`R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation. Valid values for `type', their meanings,
|
||
and target defaults are as follows:
|
||
`rel'
|
||
`R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
|
||
|
||
`abs'
|
||
`R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
|
||
|
||
`got-rel'
|
||
`R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
|
||
|
||
The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
|
||
enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
|
||
interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
|
||
but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
|
||
objects.
|
||
|
||
In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
|
||
linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
|
||
PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
|
||
|
||
In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
|
||
relocations are ignored.
|
||
|
||
Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
|
||
with a branch to the following veneer:
|
||
|
||
TST rM, #1
|
||
MOVEQ PC, rM
|
||
BX Rn
|
||
|
||
This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
|
||
cores and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer
|
||
clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior
|
||
in rare cases.
|
||
|
||
The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
|
||
instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
|
||
Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
|
||
BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
|
||
entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
|
||
|
||
This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
|
||
to specify it if you are using that target.
|
||
|
||
The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
|
||
bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
|
||
instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
|
||
code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
|
||
before the support code can read the intended values.
|
||
|
||
The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
|
||
intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
|
||
register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
|
||
at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
|
||
only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
|
||
workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
|
||
further details.
|
||
|
||
If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
|
||
workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
|
||
you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
|
||
if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
|
||
The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
|
||
|
||
If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
|
||
potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
|
||
such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
|
||
first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
|
||
instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
|
||
the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
|
||
are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
|
||
|
||
The `--fix-arm1176' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
|
||
erratum in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by
|
||
default if you are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier.
|
||
It can be disabled unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-arm1176'.
|
||
|
||
Further information is available in the "ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
|
||
Programmer Advice Notice" available on the ARM documentation website at:
|
||
http://infocenter.arm.com/.
|
||
|
||
The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
|
||
when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
|
||
size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
|
||
object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
|
||
enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
|
||
diagnosed.
|
||
|
||
The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
|
||
warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
|
||
`wchar_t' size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
|
||
linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
|
||
using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
|
||
|
||
The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
|
||
ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
|
||
PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
|
||
used to generate relocatable binaries.
|
||
|
||
The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
|
||
code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
|
||
perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
|
||
placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
|
||
controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'. The
|
||
placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
|
||
duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
|
||
group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
|
||
code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
|
||
where they should be placed.
|
||
|
||
The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
|
||
controls where the stub groups are placed. If it is negative then all
|
||
stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them. If it is
|
||
positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
|
||
branches that need them. If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
|
||
then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
|
||
using its built in heuristics. A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
|
||
smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
|
||
service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
|
||
|
||
The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
|
||
|
||
Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
|
||
only, because it relies on object files properties not present
|
||
otherwise.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: HPPA ELF32, Next: M68K, Prev: ARM, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
|
||
====================================
|
||
|
||
When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
|
||
stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application. The
|
||
`--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
|
||
different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
|
||
sub-spaces.
|
||
|
||
Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
|
||
sections located between groups of input sections. `--stub-group-size'
|
||
specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
|
||
stub section. Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
|
||
serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
|
||
and one group after it. However, when using conditional branches that
|
||
require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
|
||
sections only serve one group of input sections. A negative value for
|
||
`N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
|
||
negative offset. Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
|
||
`-1'. These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
|
||
groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
|
||
stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
|
||
|
||
Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections. A
|
||
single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
|
||
create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
|
||
large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: M68K, Next: MIPS, Prev: HPPA ELF32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
|
||
====================================
|
||
|
||
The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme. The
|
||
choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'. When
|
||
`target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
|
||
scheme for the current target. `single' tells the linker to generate a
|
||
single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets. `negative'
|
||
instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
|
||
negative and positive offsets. Not all environments support such GOTs.
|
||
`multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
|
||
file. All GOT references from a single input object file access the
|
||
same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
|
||
different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: MIPS, Next: MMIX, Prev: M68K, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.7 `ld' and the MIPS family
|
||
============================
|
||
|
||
The `--insn32' and `--no-insn32' options control the choice of
|
||
microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as
|
||
that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If `--insn32'
|
||
is used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By
|
||
default or if `--no-insn32' is used, all instruction encodings are used,
|
||
including 16-bit ones where possible.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: MMIX, Next: MSP430, Prev: MIPS, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.8 `ld' and MMIX
|
||
=================
|
||
|
||
For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
|
||
object files when linking. The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
|
||
format. The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
|
||
formats.
|
||
|
||
There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
|
||
Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
|
||
registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
|
||
symbols, equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
|
||
`.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
|
||
register multiplied by 8. Register `$255' is not included in this
|
||
section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
|
||
`Main' for `mmo' files.
|
||
|
||
Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
|
||
`__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special. The
|
||
default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
|
||
section.
|
||
|
||
Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
|
||
section, are left out from an mmo file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: MSP430, Next: PowerPC ELF32, Prev: MMIX, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.9 `ld' and MSP430
|
||
===================
|
||
|
||
For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag
|
||
`-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
|
||
MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
|
||
the linker).
|
||
|
||
The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
|
||
specific:
|
||
|
||
``.vectors''
|
||
Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
|
||
|
||
``.bootloader''
|
||
Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any
|
||
code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
||
|
||
``.infomem''
|
||
Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
|
||
this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
||
|
||
``.infomemnobits''
|
||
This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
|
||
this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
|
||
|
||
``.noinit''
|
||
Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
|
||
|
||
The last two sections are used by gcc.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: PowerPC ELF32, Next: PowerPC64 ELF64, Prev: MSP430, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.10 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
||
========================================
|
||
|
||
Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
|
||
displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
|
||
fit' errors with very large programs. `--relax' enables the generation
|
||
of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space. These
|
||
trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
|
||
be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine
|
||
`-r' and `--relax' to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
|
||
both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
|
||
considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
|
||
|
||
`--bss-plt'
|
||
Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
|
||
code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
|
||
security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
|
||
writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
|
||
`ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
|
||
if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
|
||
compiled with `-msecure-plt'. `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
|
||
(and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
|
||
|
||
`--secure-plt'
|
||
`ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
|
||
`-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
|
||
linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
|
||
layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the
|
||
old style BSS PLT.
|
||
|
||
`--sdata-got'
|
||
The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
|
||
sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The
|
||
location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
|
||
initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The
|
||
reason for the `.got' change is more subtle: The new placement
|
||
allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
|
||
relro -z now'. However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
|
||
always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
|
||
accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
|
||
`--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC GCC doesn't
|
||
use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
|
||
useful for other compilers that may do so.
|
||
|
||
`--emit-stub-syms'
|
||
This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
|
||
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
||
|
||
`--no-tls-optimize'
|
||
PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
|
||
used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to disable
|
||
the optimization.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: PowerPC64 ELF64, Next: SPU ELF, Prev: PowerPC ELF32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.11 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
||
==========================================
|
||
|
||
`--stub-group-size'
|
||
Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are
|
||
placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
|
||
sections. `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
|
||
group of input sections handled by one stub section. Since branch
|
||
offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
|
||
sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
|
||
it. However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
|
||
it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
|
||
serve one group of input sections. A negative value for `N'
|
||
chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
|
||
negative offset. Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
|
||
and `-1'. These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
|
||
section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
|
||
behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
|
||
values of `N' respectively.
|
||
|
||
Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections. A
|
||
single input section larger than the group size specified will of
|
||
course create a larger group (of one section). If input sections
|
||
are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
|
||
stub.
|
||
|
||
`--emit-stub-syms'
|
||
This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
|
||
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
||
|
||
`--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
|
||
These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
|
||
a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
|
||
function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
|
||
a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.'). To
|
||
properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
|
||
to control both `foo' and `.foo'. The option `--dotsyms', on by
|
||
default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
|
||
Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
|
||
|
||
`--no-tls-optimize'
|
||
PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
|
||
sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
|
||
disable the optimization.
|
||
|
||
`--no-opd-optimize'
|
||
PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
|
||
corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
|
||
by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
|
||
Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
|
||
|
||
`--non-overlapping-opd'
|
||
Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
|
||
`.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
|
||
the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
|
||
next entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
|
||
|
||
`--no-toc-optimize'
|
||
PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
|
||
Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
|
||
the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section marks
|
||
a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
|
||
a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
|
||
relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
|
||
unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
|
||
reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
|
||
discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
|
||
reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
|
||
assembly code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to
|
||
disable the optimization.
|
||
|
||
`--no-multi-toc'
|
||
If given any toc option besides `-mcmodel=medium' or
|
||
`-mcmodel=large', PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
|
||
where TOC entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This
|
||
limits the total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 `ld' extends this
|
||
limit by grouping code sections such that each group uses less
|
||
than 64K for its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs
|
||
between inter-group calls. `ld' does not split apart input
|
||
sections, so cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc'
|
||
section that exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files
|
||
with `ld -r'. Use this option to turn off this feature.
|
||
|
||
`--no-toc-sort'
|
||
By default, `ld' sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
|
||
happens to have a section called `.init' or `.fini' are placed
|
||
first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated with
|
||
PowerPC64 gcc's `-mcmodel=small', and lastly TOC sections
|
||
referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
|
||
`-mcmodel=medium' or `-mcmodel=large' options. Doing this results
|
||
in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn off
|
||
this feature.
|
||
|
||
`--plt-align'
|
||
`--no-plt-align'
|
||
Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
|
||
aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
|
||
boundary when using `--plt-align='. By default PLT call stubs are
|
||
packed tightly.
|
||
|
||
`--plt-static-chain'
|
||
`--no-plt-static-chain'
|
||
Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
|
||
chain pointer (r11). `ld' defaults to not loading the static
|
||
chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
|
||
|
||
`--plt-thread-safe'
|
||
`--no-thread-safe'
|
||
With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when
|
||
using lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread
|
||
and have another thread see the individual plt entry words update
|
||
in the wrong order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct
|
||
order and using memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some
|
||
sort of read barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By
|
||
default, `ld' looks for calls to commonly used functions that
|
||
create threads, and if seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use
|
||
these options to change the default behaviour.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: SPU ELF, Next: TI COFF, Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.12 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
|
||
=============================
|
||
|
||
`--plugin'
|
||
This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
|
||
|
||
`--no-overlays'
|
||
Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
|
||
regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
|
||
`ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option turns
|
||
off all this special overlay handling.
|
||
|
||
`--emit-stub-syms'
|
||
This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
|
||
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
||
|
||
`--extra-overlay-stubs'
|
||
This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
|
||
calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added on
|
||
calls to non-overlay regions.
|
||
|
||
`--local-store=lo:hi'
|
||
`ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
|
||
address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
|
||
range. Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
|
||
|
||
`--stack-analysis'
|
||
SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
|
||
unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
|
||
under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this
|
||
option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
|
||
`ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
|
||
the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
|
||
stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
|
||
for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
|
||
for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
|
||
find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
|
||
recursion and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
|
||
under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage
|
||
for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a
|
||
link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
|
||
stack usage and calls will be given.
|
||
|
||
`--emit-stack-syms'
|
||
This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
|
||
`ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function. These take
|
||
the form `__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
|
||
`__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
|
||
`<number>' is the section id in hex. The value of such symbols is
|
||
the stack requirement for the corresponding function. The symbol
|
||
size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
|
||
section `SHN_ABS'.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: TI COFF, Next: WIN32, Prev: SPU ELF, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.13 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
|
||
================================================
|
||
|
||
The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
|
||
versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
|
||
supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
|
||
`ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
|
||
depends on the default specified by the specific target.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: WIN32, Next: Xtensa, Prev: TI COFF, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.14 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
||
==================================
|
||
|
||
This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues. See
|
||
*Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
|
||
command line options mentioned here.
|
||
|
||
_import libraries_
|
||
The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
|
||
libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They
|
||
are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
|
||
archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
|
||
for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
|
||
command line option.
|
||
|
||
_exporting DLL symbols_
|
||
The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
|
||
|
||
_using auto-export functionality_
|
||
By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
|
||
functionality, which is controlled by the following command
|
||
line options:
|
||
|
||
* -export-all-symbols [This is the default]
|
||
|
||
* -exclude-symbols
|
||
|
||
* -exclude-libs
|
||
|
||
* -exclude-modules-for-implib
|
||
|
||
* -version-script
|
||
|
||
When auto-export is in operation, `ld' will export all the
|
||
non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with
|
||
the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the
|
||
system's runtime and libraries. As it will often not be
|
||
desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
|
||
private functions that are not part of any public interface,
|
||
the command-line options listed above may be used to filter
|
||
symbols out from the list for exporting. The `--output-def'
|
||
option can be used in order to see the final list of exported
|
||
symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
|
||
|
||
If `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on the
|
||
command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be
|
||
_disabled_ if either of the following are true:
|
||
|
||
* A DEF file is used.
|
||
|
||
* Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
|
||
__declspec(dllexport) attribute.
|
||
|
||
_using a DEF file_
|
||
Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF
|
||
file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
|
||
should be exported when a dll is created. Usually it is
|
||
named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
|
||
to the linker's command line. The file's name must end in
|
||
`.def' or `.DEF'.
|
||
|
||
gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
|
||
|
||
Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
|
||
unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
|
||
|
||
Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
|
||
`xyz.dll':
|
||
|
||
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
|
||
|
||
EXPORTS
|
||
foo
|
||
bar
|
||
_bar = bar
|
||
another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
|
||
var1 DATA
|
||
doo = foo == foo2
|
||
eoo DATA == var1
|
||
|
||
This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
|
||
and seven symbols in the export table. The third exported
|
||
symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
|
||
`another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
|
||
and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
|
||
`abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
|
||
object. The `doo' symbol in export library is an alias of
|
||
`foo', which gets the string name in export table `foo2'. The
|
||
`eoo' symbol is an data export symbol, which gets in export
|
||
table the name `var1'.
|
||
|
||
The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
|
||
name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
|
||
the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
|
||
|
||
When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
|
||
than a library, the `NAME <name>' command should be used
|
||
instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
|
||
the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
|
||
|
||
With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
|
||
specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
|
||
non-default base address for the image.
|
||
|
||
If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor `NAME <name>' is specified,
|
||
or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
|
||
same as the filename specified on the command line.
|
||
|
||
The complete specification of an export symbol is:
|
||
|
||
EXPORTS
|
||
( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
|
||
| ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
|
||
[ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
|
||
|
||
Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
|
||
declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
|
||
declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
|
||
`<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'. Optionally,
|
||
the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
|
||
`<integer>' alias. The optional `<name3>' is the to be used
|
||
string in import/export table for the symbol.
|
||
|
||
The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
|
||
|
||
`NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
|
||
table. It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
|
||
(either the value specified by the .def specification or,
|
||
otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
|
||
name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
|
||
any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
|
||
|
||
`DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
|
||
function. The import lib will export only an indirect
|
||
reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
|
||
be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
|
||
|
||
`CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
|
||
well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
|
||
read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
|
||
to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
|
||
code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
|
||
explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
|
||
attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
|
||
|
||
`PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
|
||
not put it into the static import library used to resolve
|
||
imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
|
||
the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
|
||
using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
|
||
without an import library.
|
||
|
||
See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
|
||
specification of other DEF file statements
|
||
|
||
While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
|
||
with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
|
||
|
||
_Using decorations_
|
||
Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
|
||
source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
|
||
to be exported is declared as:
|
||
|
||
__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
|
||
__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
||
|
||
All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
|
||
any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
|
||
in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
|
||
disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
|
||
used.
|
||
|
||
Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
|
||
_not_ decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use
|
||
dllimport, instead:
|
||
|
||
__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
|
||
__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
||
|
||
This complicates the structure of library header files,
|
||
because when included by the library itself the header must
|
||
declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
|
||
included by client code the header must declare them as
|
||
dllimport. There are a number of idioms that are typically
|
||
used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
|
||
declaration completely. See `--enable-auto-import' and
|
||
`automatic data imports' for more information.
|
||
|
||
_automatic data imports_
|
||
The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
|
||
only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
|
||
let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
|
||
with this issue. This increases the effort necessary to port
|
||
existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
|
||
libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
|
||
initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
|
||
decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
|
||
POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
|
||
`--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
|
||
by default on cygwin/mingw. The `--enable-auto-import' option
|
||
itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
|
||
ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
|
||
|
||
auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
|
||
additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
|
||
|
||
"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
||
documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
|
||
|
||
The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
|
||
occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
|
||
difficulty. One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
|
||
feature, described below.
|
||
|
||
For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
|
||
classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
|
||
variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
|
||
particular field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately,
|
||
the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
|
||
fixing these references at runtime without the additional
|
||
information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations. The
|
||
standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
|
||
these references.
|
||
|
||
The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
|
||
references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
|
||
adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
|
||
to specialized code provided by the runtime environment. Recent
|
||
versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
|
||
provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
|
||
support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
|
||
compiled result will run without error on an older system.
|
||
|
||
`--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
|
||
explicitly enabled as needed.
|
||
|
||
_direct linking to a dll_
|
||
The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
|
||
including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
|
||
libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than
|
||
does the traditional import library method, especially when
|
||
linking large libraries or applications. When `ld' creates an
|
||
import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
|
||
stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
|
||
exports. The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
|
||
processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
|
||
tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
|
||
particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
|
||
|
||
Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
|
||
other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
|
||
number of names to match each library. All that is needed from
|
||
the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
|
||
order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
|
||
|
||
For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
|
||
attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
|
||
|
||
libxxx.dll.a
|
||
xxx.dll.a
|
||
libxxx.a
|
||
xxx.lib
|
||
cygxxx.dll (*)
|
||
libxxx.dll
|
||
xxx.dll
|
||
|
||
before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
|
||
|
||
(*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
|
||
`<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
|
||
`--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
|
||
standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
|
||
effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
|
||
|
||
Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
|
||
use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
|
||
of this feature. It was originally intended to help avoid name
|
||
conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
|
||
environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
|
||
could coexist on the same machine.
|
||
|
||
The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
|
||
applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
|
||
libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
|
||
|
||
bin/
|
||
cygxxx.dll
|
||
lib/
|
||
libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
|
||
libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
|
||
|
||
Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
|
||
done two ways:
|
||
|
||
1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
|
||
gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
|
||
|
||
However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
|
||
names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
|
||
specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version. Import
|
||
libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
|
||
|
||
2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
|
||
directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
|
||
should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
|
||
making the app/dll.
|
||
|
||
ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
|
||
|
||
Then you can link without any make environment changes.
|
||
|
||
gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
|
||
|
||
This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
|
||
the following is perfectly legal
|
||
|
||
bin/
|
||
cygxxx-5.dll
|
||
lib/
|
||
libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
|
||
|
||
Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
|
||
even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
|
||
`--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
|
||
|
||
Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
|
||
justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all. There
|
||
are three reasons:
|
||
|
||
1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
|
||
work with auto-imported data.
|
||
|
||
2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
|
||
the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
|
||
indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again,
|
||
the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
|
||
and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
|
||
|
||
3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This
|
||
is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
|
||
API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
|
||
of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
|
||
|
||
So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
|
||
true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
|
||
dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
|
||
binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
|
||
massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
|
||
requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
|
||
will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
|
||
|
||
_symbol aliasing_
|
||
|
||
_adding additional names_
|
||
Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
|
||
names. A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
|
||
also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
|
||
DEF file when creating the dll. This will affect also the
|
||
optional created import library. Consider the following DEF
|
||
file:
|
||
|
||
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
||
|
||
EXPORTS
|
||
foo
|
||
_foo = foo
|
||
|
||
The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
|
||
|
||
Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
|
||
the source code using the "weak" attribute:
|
||
|
||
void foo () { /* Do something. */; }
|
||
void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
|
||
|
||
See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
|
||
weak symbols.
|
||
|
||
_renaming symbols_
|
||
Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the
|
||
cygwin kernel does this regularly. A symbol `_foo' can be
|
||
exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
|
||
directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
|
||
library, if it is created). In the following example:
|
||
|
||
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
||
|
||
EXPORTS
|
||
_foo = foo
|
||
|
||
The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
|
||
`_foo'.
|
||
|
||
Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
|
||
unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
|
||
If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
|
||
_all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
|
||
are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
|
||
option. If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
|
||
use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
|
||
both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
|
||
symbols will be exported. In effect, you'd be aliasing those
|
||
symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
|
||
|
||
_weak externals_
|
||
The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
|
||
called weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the
|
||
symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
|
||
other symbol. There are three variants of weak externals:
|
||
* Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
|
||
historically called lazy externals.
|
||
|
||
* Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
|
||
libraries. This form is not presently implemented.
|
||
|
||
* No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
|
||
implemented.
|
||
As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
|
||
symbol are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking,
|
||
the symbol uses a default value.
|
||
|
||
_aligned common symbols_
|
||
As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to
|
||
specify the desired alignment for a common symbol. This
|
||
information is conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the
|
||
linker by means of GNU-specific commands carried in the object
|
||
file's `.drectve' section, which are recognized by `ld' and
|
||
respected when laying out the common symbols. Native tools will
|
||
be able to process object files employing this GNU extension, but
|
||
will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue
|
||
noisy warnings about unknown linker directives.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Xtensa, Prev: WIN32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
||
|
||
4.15 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
|
||
===============================
|
||
|
||
The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
|
||
`SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
|
||
specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
|
||
keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
|
||
example, with the command:
|
||
|
||
SECTIONS
|
||
{
|
||
.text : {
|
||
*(.literal .text)
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
`ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
|
||
different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
|
||
range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid interleaving might place
|
||
the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
|
||
`.text' sections of that group of files. Then, the `.literal' sections
|
||
from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
|
||
the files would follow.
|
||
|
||
Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
|
||
provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
|
||
is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
|
||
literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
|
||
will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
|
||
location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
|
||
the `L32R' instructions. The second optimization is to remove
|
||
unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
|
||
`L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
|
||
`CALLN' instructions.
|
||
|
||
For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
|
||
optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
|
||
instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
|
||
and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
|
||
not used for anything else. Removing the `L32R' instruction always
|
||
reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
|
||
alignment of subsequent branch targets. By default, the linker will
|
||
always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
|
||
between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
|
||
inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
|
||
If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
|
||
option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
|
||
instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
|
||
are required for correctness.
|
||
|
||
The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
|
||
control the linker:
|
||
|
||
`--size-opt'
|
||
When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
|
||
size more than performance. With this option, the linker will not
|
||
insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
|
||
target alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are
|
||
required to preserve the correctness of the code.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: BFD, Next: Reporting Bugs, Prev: Machine Dependent, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
5 BFD
|
||
*****
|
||
|
||
The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
|
||
These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
|
||
object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
|
||
format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
|
||
it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
|
||
associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
|
||
object file formats available. You can use `objdump -i' (*note
|
||
objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
|
||
your configuration.
|
||
|
||
As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
|
||
conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
|
||
efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
|
||
would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
|
||
offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
|
||
back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
|
||
greater speed.
|
||
|
||
One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
|
||
is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
|
||
useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
|
||
conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: BFD outline, Up: BFD
|
||
|
||
5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
|
||
===================================
|
||
|
||
When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
|
||
the format of the input object file. They then build a descriptor in
|
||
memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
|
||
the object file's data structures.
|
||
|
||
As different information from the object files is required, BFD
|
||
reads from different sections of the file and processes them. For
|
||
example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
|
||
tables. Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
|
||
the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
|
||
format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
|
||
calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
|
||
back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form. The
|
||
linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
|
||
and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
|
||
end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
|
||
convert it into the chosen output format.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* BFD information loss:: Information Loss
|
||
* Canonical format:: The BFD canonical object-file format
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: BFD information loss, Next: Canonical format, Up: BFD outline
|
||
|
||
5.1.1 Information Loss
|
||
----------------------
|
||
|
||
_Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
|
||
by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
|
||
be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
|
||
example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
|
||
in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
|
||
contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
|
||
image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
|
||
output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
|
||
internally, so the link is performed correctly).
|
||
|
||
Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
|
||
unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
|
||
the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
|
||
(e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
|
||
the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
|
||
describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
|
||
command language.
|
||
|
||
_Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
|
||
canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
|
||
structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
|
||
internally. This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
|
||
possible data richness through the transformation between external to
|
||
internal and back to external formats.
|
||
|
||
This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
|
||
format and writes another. Each BFD back end is responsible for
|
||
maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
|
||
form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
|
||
to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
|
||
is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
|
||
end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
|
||
is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
|
||
able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
|
||
information it prepared earlier. Since there is a great deal of
|
||
commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
|
||
linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
|
||
`b.out'. When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
|
||
lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Canonical format, Prev: BFD information loss, Up: BFD outline
|
||
|
||
5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
|
||
------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
|
||
least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
|
||
that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
|
||
format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
|
||
understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
|
||
conversions.
|
||
|
||
_files_
|
||
Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
|
||
architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
|
||
pageable bit, and a write protected bit. Information like Unix
|
||
magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
|
||
so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
|
||
write protected text bit set. The byte order of the target is
|
||
stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
|
||
files may be used with one another.
|
||
|
||
_sections_
|
||
Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
|
||
the section's original address in the object file, size and
|
||
alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
|
||
data structures.
|
||
|
||
_symbols_
|
||
Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
|
||
file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
|
||
flag bits. When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
|
||
relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
|
||
section where they were defined. Doing this ensures that each
|
||
symbol points to its containing section. Each symbol also has a
|
||
varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end. Since
|
||
the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
|
||
for that symbol is accessible. `ld' can operate on a collection
|
||
of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
|
||
|
||
Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
|
||
so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
|
||
pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
|
||
Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
|
||
information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
|
||
This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
|
||
linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
|
||
|
||
There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
|
||
format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
|
||
example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
|
||
within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
|
||
information will be preserved.
|
||
|
||
_relocation level_
|
||
Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
|
||
symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
|
||
section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
|
||
descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
|
||
the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
|
||
relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
|
||
method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
|
||
instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format. A relocation
|
||
record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
|
||
routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
|
||
byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
|
||
such relocation type.
|
||
|
||
_line numbers_
|
||
Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
|
||
mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
|
||
output file. These addresses have to be relocated along with the
|
||
symbol information. Each symbol with an associated list of line
|
||
number records points to the first record of the list. The head
|
||
of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
|
||
allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
|
||
is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
|
||
offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
|
||
simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
|
||
formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Reporting Bugs, Next: MRI, Prev: BFD, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
6 Reporting Bugs
|
||
****************
|
||
|
||
Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
|
||
|
||
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
|
||
or it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report
|
||
is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
|
||
better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
|
||
|
||
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
|
||
information that enables us to fix the bug.
|
||
|
||
* Menu:
|
||
|
||
* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
|
||
* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Bug Criteria, Next: Bug Reporting, Up: Reporting Bugs
|
||
|
||
6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
|
||
=========================
|
||
|
||
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
|
||
guidelines:
|
||
|
||
* If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
|
||
a `ld' bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
|
||
|
||
* If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
|
||
|
||
* If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
|
||
may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
|
||
object files are correct.
|
||
|
||
* If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
|
||
improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: Bug Reporting, Prev: Bug Criteria, Up: Reporting Bugs
|
||
|
||
6.2 How to Report Bugs
|
||
======================
|
||
|
||
A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
|
||
If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
|
||
contact that organization first.
|
||
|
||
You can find contact information for many support companies and
|
||
individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
|
||
|
||
Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
|
||
`http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'.
|
||
|
||
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
|
||
*report all the facts*. If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
|
||
leave it out, state it!
|
||
|
||
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
|
||
problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
|
||
assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
|
||
Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug
|
||
is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
|
||
where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
|
||
different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
|
||
doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
|
||
specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
|
||
and the most helpful.
|
||
|
||
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
|
||
the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
|
||
on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
|
||
|
||
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
|
||
bell?" This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
|
||
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate. You
|
||
might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
|
||
|
||
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
|
||
|
||
* The version of `ld'. `ld' announces it if you start it with the
|
||
`--version' argument.
|
||
|
||
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
|
||
looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
|
||
|
||
* Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
|
||
patches made to the `BFD' library.
|
||
|
||
* The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
|
||
and version number.
|
||
|
||
* What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
|
||
"`gcc-2.7'".
|
||
|
||
* The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
|
||
observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something
|
||
important, list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output
|
||
from make) is sufficient.
|
||
|
||
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
|
||
wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
|
||
|
||
* A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
|
||
the bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
|
||
files provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than
|
||
10K. For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
|
||
or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
|
||
file(s) to whomever requests them. (Note - your email will be
|
||
going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
|
||
large attachments). But small attachments are best.
|
||
|
||
If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
|
||
`gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
|
||
object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
|
||
`gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files. Also say how
|
||
`gas' or `gcc' were configured.
|
||
|
||
* A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
|
||
incorrect. For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
|
||
|
||
Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
|
||
will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we
|
||
might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well
|
||
not give us a chance to make a mistake.
|
||
|
||
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
|
||
still say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on,
|
||
such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
|
||
a bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your
|
||
copy might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a
|
||
crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
|
||
was not happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a
|
||
crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
|
||
observations.
|
||
|
||
* If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
|
||
diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
|
||
Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
|
||
discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
|
||
by line number.
|
||
|
||
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
|
||
in your sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful
|
||
information to us.
|
||
|
||
Here are some things that are not necessary:
|
||
|
||
* A description of the envelope of the bug.
|
||
|
||
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
|
||
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
|
||
changes will not affect it.
|
||
|
||
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
|
||
we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
|
||
debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
|
||
examples. We recommend that you save your time for something else.
|
||
|
||
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
|
||
of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
|
||
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
|
||
less time, and so on.
|
||
|
||
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
|
||
this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
|
||
used.
|
||
|
||
* A patch for the bug.
|
||
|
||
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not
|
||
omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
|
||
assumption that a patch is all we need. We might see problems
|
||
with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
|
||
might not understand it at all.
|
||
|
||
Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
|
||
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
|
||
path through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will
|
||
not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
|
||
that the bug is fixed.
|
||
|
||
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
|
||
your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A
|
||
test case will help us to understand.
|
||
|
||
* A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
|
||
|
||
Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about
|
||
such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: MRI, Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Prev: Reporting Bugs, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
|
||
**************************************
|
||
|
||
To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
|
||
`ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
|
||
more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
|
||
Scripts::. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
|
||
set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'. GNU `ld'
|
||
supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
|
||
described here.
|
||
|
||
In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
|
||
file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
|
||
features to make use of them.
|
||
|
||
You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
|
||
`-c' command-line option.
|
||
|
||
Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
|
||
command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
|
||
blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
|
||
MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
|
||
a warning message, but continues processing the script.
|
||
|
||
Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
|
||
|
||
You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
|
||
lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'. The following
|
||
list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
|
||
|
||
`ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
|
||
`ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
|
||
Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
|
||
the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
|
||
use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
|
||
present in your output program. If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
|
||
at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
|
||
`ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output. You can
|
||
still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
|
||
line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
|
||
|
||
`ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
|
||
Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
|
||
in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
|
||
|
||
IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
|
||
|
||
`ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
|
||
Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION. The EXPRESSION
|
||
should be a power of two.
|
||
|
||
`BASE EXPRESSION'
|
||
Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
|
||
absolute addresses) in the output file.
|
||
|
||
`CHIP EXPRESSION'
|
||
`CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
|
||
This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
|
||
|
||
`END'
|
||
This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
|
||
compatibility.
|
||
|
||
`FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
|
||
Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
|
||
language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
|
||
|
||
1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
|
||
|
||
2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
|
||
|
||
3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
|
||
`COFF'
|
||
|
||
`LIST ANYTHING...'
|
||
Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
|
||
`ld' command-line option `-M'.
|
||
|
||
The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
|
||
with no change in its effect.
|
||
|
||
`LOAD FILENAME'
|
||
`LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
|
||
Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
|
||
same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
|
||
line.
|
||
|
||
`NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
|
||
OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
|
||
MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
|
||
option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
|
||
|
||
`ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
|
||
`ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
|
||
Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
|
||
in which they first appear in the input files. In an
|
||
MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
|
||
`ORDER' command. The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
|
||
first in your output file, in the order specified.
|
||
|
||
`PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
|
||
`PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
|
||
`PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
|
||
Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
|
||
linker input files.
|
||
|
||
`SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
|
||
`SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
|
||
`SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
|
||
You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
|
||
specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME. If
|
||
you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
|
||
the _first_ sets the start address.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: GNU Free Documentation License, Next: LD Index, Prev: MRI, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
|
||
*****************************************
|
||
|
||
Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
|
||
|
||
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
||
`http://fsf.org/'
|
||
|
||
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
|
||
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
|
||
|
||
0. PREAMBLE
|
||
|
||
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
|
||
functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
|
||
assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
|
||
with or without modifying it, either commercially or
|
||
noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the
|
||
author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
|
||
being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
|
||
|
||
This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
|
||
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
|
||
It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
|
||
license designed for free software.
|
||
|
||
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
|
||
free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
|
||
free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
|
||
that the software does. But this License is not limited to
|
||
software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
|
||
of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
|
||
We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
|
||
instruction or reference.
|
||
|
||
1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
|
||
|
||
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
|
||
that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
|
||
can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice
|
||
grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
|
||
to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The
|
||
"Document", below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member
|
||
of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you". You
|
||
accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a
|
||
way requiring permission under copyright law.
|
||
|
||
A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
|
||
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
|
||
modifications and/or translated into another language.
|
||
|
||
A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
|
||
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
|
||
publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
|
||
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
|
||
fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document
|
||
is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
|
||
explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of
|
||
historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
|
||
of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
|
||
regarding them.
|
||
|
||
The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
|
||
titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
|
||
the notice that says that the Document is released under this
|
||
License. If a section does not fit the above definition of
|
||
Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.
|
||
The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document
|
||
does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
|
||
|
||
The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
|
||
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
|
||
that says that the Document is released under this License. A
|
||
Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
|
||
be at most 25 words.
|
||
|
||
A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
|
||
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
|
||
general public, that is suitable for revising the document
|
||
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
|
||
composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
|
||
widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
|
||
text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
|
||
formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an
|
||
otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of
|
||
markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent
|
||
modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is
|
||
not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A
|
||
copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
|
||
|
||
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
|
||
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
|
||
SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
|
||
standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for
|
||
human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include
|
||
PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that
|
||
can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or
|
||
XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
|
||
available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF
|
||
produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
|
||
|
||
The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
|
||
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
|
||
material this License requires to appear in the title page. For
|
||
works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
|
||
Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
|
||
work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
|
||
|
||
The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
|
||
of the Document to the public.
|
||
|
||
A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
|
||
whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
|
||
following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ
|
||
stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
|
||
"Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
|
||
To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
|
||
Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
|
||
to this definition.
|
||
|
||
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
|
||
which states that this License applies to the Document. These
|
||
Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
|
||
this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
|
||
implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
|
||
has no effect on the meaning of this License.
|
||
|
||
2. VERBATIM COPYING
|
||
|
||
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
|
||
commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
|
||
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
|
||
applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
|
||
add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You
|
||
may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
|
||
or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However,
|
||
you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you
|
||
distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
|
||
the conditions in section 3.
|
||
|
||
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
|
||
and you may publicly display copies.
|
||
|
||
3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
|
||
|
||
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
|
||
have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
|
||
the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
|
||
enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
|
||
these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
|
||
Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly
|
||
and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The
|
||
front cover must present the full title with all words of the
|
||
title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material
|
||
on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the
|
||
covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
|
||
satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
|
||
other respects.
|
||
|
||
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
|
||
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
|
||
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
|
||
adjacent pages.
|
||
|
||
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
|
||
numbering more than 100, you must either include a
|
||
machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
|
||
state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from
|
||
which the general network-using public has access to download
|
||
using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent
|
||
copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the
|
||
latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
|
||
begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
|
||
this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
|
||
location until at least one year after the last time you
|
||
distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
|
||
retailers) of that edition to the public.
|
||
|
||
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
|
||
the Document well before redistributing any large number of
|
||
copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
|
||
version of the Document.
|
||
|
||
4. MODIFICATIONS
|
||
|
||
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
|
||
under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
|
||
release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
|
||
the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
|
||
licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
|
||
whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these
|
||
things in the Modified Version:
|
||
|
||
A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
|
||
distinct from that of the Document, and from those of
|
||
previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed
|
||
in the History section of the Document). You may use the
|
||
same title as a previous version if the original publisher of
|
||
that version gives permission.
|
||
|
||
B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
|
||
entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
|
||
the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
|
||
principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
|
||
authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
|
||
from this requirement.
|
||
|
||
C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
|
||
Modified Version, as the publisher.
|
||
|
||
D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
|
||
|
||
E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
|
||
adjacent to the other copyright notices.
|
||
|
||
F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
|
||
notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
|
||
Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
|
||
the Addendum below.
|
||
|
||
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
|
||
Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
|
||
license notice.
|
||
|
||
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
|
||
|
||
I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
|
||
and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
|
||
authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on
|
||
the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled "History" in
|
||
the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors,
|
||
and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page,
|
||
then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in
|
||
the previous sentence.
|
||
|
||
J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
|
||
for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
|
||
likewise the network locations given in the Document for
|
||
previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in
|
||
the "History" section. You may omit a network location for a
|
||
work that was published at least four years before the
|
||
Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version
|
||
it refers to gives permission.
|
||
|
||
K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
|
||
Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the
|
||
section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
|
||
acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
|
||
|
||
L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
|
||
unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
|
||
or the equivalent are not considered part of the section
|
||
titles.
|
||
|
||
M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
|
||
may not be included in the Modified Version.
|
||
|
||
N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
|
||
"Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
|
||
Section.
|
||
|
||
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
|
||
|
||
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
|
||
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
|
||
material copied from the Document, you may at your option
|
||
designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this,
|
||
add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
|
||
Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any
|
||
other section titles.
|
||
|
||
You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
|
||
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
|
||
parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
|
||
has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
|
||
definition of a standard.
|
||
|
||
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
|
||
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
|
||
of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one
|
||
passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
|
||
added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the
|
||
Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
|
||
previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
|
||
you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
|
||
replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
|
||
publisher that added the old one.
|
||
|
||
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
|
||
License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
|
||
assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
|
||
|
||
5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
|
||
|
||
You may combine the Document with other documents released under
|
||
this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
|
||
modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
|
||
all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
|
||
unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
|
||
combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
|
||
their Warranty Disclaimers.
|
||
|
||
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
|
||
multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
|
||
copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
|
||
but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
|
||
by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
|
||
original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
|
||
unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
|
||
the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
|
||
combined work.
|
||
|
||
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
|
||
"History" in the various original documents, forming one section
|
||
Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
|
||
"Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You
|
||
must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
|
||
|
||
6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
|
||
|
||
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
|
||
documents released under this License, and replace the individual
|
||
copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
|
||
that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
|
||
rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
|
||
documents in all other respects.
|
||
|
||
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
|
||
distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
|
||
a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
|
||
this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
|
||
that document.
|
||
|
||
7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
|
||
|
||
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
|
||
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
|
||
a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
|
||
copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
|
||
legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
|
||
works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
|
||
License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
|
||
are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
|
||
|
||
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
|
||
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
|
||
of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
|
||
on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
|
||
electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
|
||
form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
|
||
the whole aggregate.
|
||
|
||
8. TRANSLATION
|
||
|
||
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
|
||
distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
|
||
4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
|
||
permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
|
||
translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
|
||
original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
|
||
translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
|
||
Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
|
||
include the original English version of this License and the
|
||
original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a
|
||
disagreement between the translation and the original version of
|
||
this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
|
||
prevail.
|
||
|
||
If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
|
||
"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
|
||
Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
|
||
actual title.
|
||
|
||
9. TERMINATION
|
||
|
||
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
|
||
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
|
||
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
|
||
and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
|
||
|
||
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
|
||
license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
|
||
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly
|
||
and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
|
||
copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
|
||
reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
|
||
|
||
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
|
||
reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
|
||
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
|
||
received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
|
||
that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
|
||
after your receipt of the notice.
|
||
|
||
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
|
||
the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
|
||
you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and
|
||
not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of
|
||
the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
|
||
|
||
10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
|
||
|
||
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
|
||
the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
|
||
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
|
||
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
|
||
`http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/'.
|
||
|
||
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
|
||
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
|
||
version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
|
||
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
|
||
that specified version or of any later version that has been
|
||
published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If
|
||
the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
|
||
you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
|
||
Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy
|
||
can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
|
||
proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
|
||
authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
|
||
|
||
11. RELICENSING
|
||
|
||
"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
|
||
World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
|
||
provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A
|
||
public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
|
||
A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
|
||
site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
|
||
site.
|
||
|
||
"CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
|
||
license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
|
||
corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
|
||
California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
|
||
published by that same organization.
|
||
|
||
"Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
|
||
in part, as part of another Document.
|
||
|
||
An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
|
||
License, and if all works that were first published under this
|
||
License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
|
||
incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
|
||
texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
|
||
to November 1, 2008.
|
||
|
||
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
|
||
site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
|
||
2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
|
||
====================================================
|
||
|
||
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
|
||
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
|
||
notices just after the title page:
|
||
|
||
Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR NAME.
|
||
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
||
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
|
||
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
||
with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
|
||
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
|
||
Free Documentation License''.
|
||
|
||
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
|
||
Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
|
||
|
||
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
|
||
the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
|
||
being LIST.
|
||
|
||
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
|
||
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
|
||
situation.
|
||
|
||
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
|
||
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
|
||
free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
|
||
permit their use in free software.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File: ld.info, Node: LD Index, Prev: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Top
|
||
|
||
LD Index
|
||
********
|
||
|
||
|